n THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES lfe*^**w**w** tie r,K Copyright, 1892, by CURTIS HAVEN, Chicago. IKXAS 300-WORDS-A-MlNUTE SHORTHAND LESSONS. PRESENTING IN TWELVE LESSONS, WITHIN THE COMPREHENSION OF A CHILD, EVERY IMPORTANT PHONOGRAPHIC DEVICE KNOWN TO THE" MOST SKILL- FUL SHORTHAND WRITERS OF THE WORLD AND OF ALLSYSTEM? , BEING THE ONLY TREATISE GIVING THE PROFESSIONAL OUTLINES FROM THE VERY FIRST LESSON. LESSON I. DEFINITION. Shorthand writing is of two kinds stenography and phonography. Stenography was the shorthand of the ancients, and is not much in use today. It involves the learning of hundreds of arbitrary signs for words, and is very difficult to master. Phonography is the shorthand of the present, and is the one employed by nine of every ten shorthand reporters, although all shorthand writers are called stenographers, because the old name still clings to them. Phonog- raphy is the only scientific shorthand, and is quite easily learned, if the instructions contained in these lessons are followed. The name phonography is a union of two Greek words, phone and graphc, the former meaning sound (or voice), and the latter a writing, thus making the actual definition of phonography to be sou/id writing or voice writing, that is, to write the sounds of the voice. The science was given that name because, in writing phonography, spelling is done by actual sound, not according to the usual way of spelling. For instance, the dictionaries would spell the word nigh this way n-i-g-h using four letters. But in phonography we would spell nigh according to its sound, thus, n-i. And all other words on the same plan, thus, n-a, nay, n-u, knew, etc., etc., etc. Hence it will be seen that phonography is to the human voice what photography is to the features^one places on paper a likeness of our form, the other a like- ness of our speech. Spelling, as taught in school, does not do this; neither does stenography. Therefore, they are deficient in speed. But phonog- raphy, by saving time in spelling, gives speed in two ways: i. e., both in the use of less letters, and in briefer signs. PRACTICAL PHONOGRAPHY. The elements of Haven's Practical Phonography are two alphabets, one visible and the other invisible a portion of the visible alphabet being pre- sented in the following sixteen signs: \ P ^_ T \ B -^ V I T c ^ rrn Pronotmced i n J_A5 in Mith ITHorTM or These. 1 D ) 5 Ch [Pronounced [as in Watch TCHAf\ or Chair.] J I' (Pronounced ISHorZffiZ L<3s ZL Pish orAzv.re^_ / J r L s* [pronounced GAY\ ^ M T\T ** |_<2,s in 6fa.2n. J ^-^ N. The first column of shorthand letters in above list is composed of simple straight lines written alternately light and heavy and slanting in pairs at four different angles. The other column of shorthand letters are all lightly written curves, each one of them being a quarter of a circle, as the following diagrams containing all the letters above given will show: M L V Th ^j) S | K F ^5h By the above, it will be seen that the straight letters are each one-quarter of a complete square, just as the curved letters are each a quarter of a complete circle; though it will also be seen that the two circles and squares, in 'above diagram, are each divided into different quarters from the other. This is illustrated still further by the diagram below: M T TV. 1 N/ i eJ V^X. / ^ K HjH Gay N D The straight characters are readily enough distinguished as to slant, but sometimes beginners are apt to make mistakes in relation to the slant of the curves, and in order to impress the direction of the curves well upon the beginner's mind, the following diagrams, showing the exact slant of each curve in comparison with the straight letters, is given: P V ^S Th(|) 3 From above, the student will observe that the points of the curved letters F and V begin and end at the same position, regarding the line, as the straight letter P would; that the curves Th and S begin and end in similar positions to T, L and Sh to Chay, and M and N to K. Pronounce the double letters Ch, Th, and Sh, as indicated in the list: Chay, Ith, and Ish never C-h, T-h, and S-h. The sound for G should also be always pronounced Gay. These four signs require special pronunciation, for reasons which will be better appreciated by students as they progress. Always write the signs for K, Gay, M, and N from left to right. Write L upward. The other signs in foregoing list are written downward. Other letters of the visible alphabet will be given in subsequent lessons. SPELLING BY POSITION. The invisible alphabet also need not necessarily be altogether presented in this first Jesson, but its use and three of its letters are best given. The invisible alphabet is really a method of spelling by position. That is, writing a visible letter (any one of those in foregoing list, for instance) in a certain position in accordance with the ruled line of the paper you are writing upon, and by that position indicating after the written letter the presence of some other letter not written. The letters written to indicate invisible letters are called consonants; the sounds indicated without being written are called vowels. Three of the vowel sounds, which are thus indicated invisibly, are I, A, and U, the mode of indicating them being to write a consonant above the ruled line of your writing paper when you desire to indicate I; write the consonant resting on the line to indicate A; and strike the consonant through or place beneath the line to indicate U. For instance, suppose you desired to write the word nigh in shorthand: That word in shorthand would be spelled with only the two letters n and i, thus, n-i, nigh. Now, N is a visible-consonant, as will be seen by referring to your list of letters at the beginning of this lesson. And we have just said that the sound of I may be indicated after a written letter without writing I, by placing any visible consonant above the line of the paper you are writing upon. So, by simply placing our shorthand letter N above the line, we indicate the sound of I after it, and thereby spell n-i, nigh, as with sign i in Exercise. Then, in accordance with the rule for indicating the sound of the letter A, without writing it, we have only to place our letter N on the line, and we invisibly indicate after N, the sound of A, thus spelling n-a, nay, as with sign 2 in Exercise. Finally, by writing N under the line of our paper, we indicate after N the sound of U, and thus spell n-u, knew, as with sign 3 in Exercise. By the above description, the student sees that it is \he position of the written consonant that indicates the sound of the invisible letter; and, there- fore, any consonant of the visible alphabet may thus /^visibly indicate the sound of I after it, if such written letter be placed above the line of writing; A, if placed on the line; and U, if struck through or placed below the line. The horizontal letters K, Gay, M, and N can not be written through the line, which is why they are written under the line to indicate U after them, the other letters being easily struck through the line, as in signs 6, 7, 15, 17, etc., in Exercise. The dotted lines in our Exercise represent the ruled lines of ordinary writing paper. If the student has carefully read all of Part I, of this book, especially noted the explanation under heading of " Preliminary Information," on pages 1 6 and 17, and memorized the sixteen letters so far given of the Visible Alphabet, commencing this lesson, he or she is now ready to pro- ceed with the study of Exercise I, at end of this lesson, which should be done in accordance with the following plan: 1. Read carefully the entire Exercise, tracing over with a dry pen each shorthand letter, as you read it. The tracing helps to train your hand to a familiarity with the correct formation of the shorthand letters. 2. Write with pencil each separate word or combination of Exercise at least twelve consecutive times on your practicing paper. 3. Transcribe the entire Exercise into long hand, afterward comparing your interpretation with the Key below Exercise. Repeat until perfect. 4. Looking only at the Key, write it into shorthand, afterward com- paring your shorthand writing with the shorthand of the printed Exercise, repeating this wholesome practice until satisfactory, but without attempting to write faster than you can write well. Speed will come with careful practice. These rules are alike applicable to every lesson of this course. And, in addition, in private study, the name of each sign should be repeated aloud as it is written, a proceeding which will train the ear to recognize the proper ^ound, and, at the same time, train the hand to form the sign upon the writer hearing the sound represented. Use a soft pencil for practicing, holding it between the first and second finger, keeping it in place by the thumb. This position enables the student to write with more ease than by holding the pencil between the- thumb and first finger, besides insuring quicker writing generally, and more perfectly formed shorthand.. The best pencil for shorthand practice or professional use is a soft medium pencil, called by different manufacturers No. 2, or SM; and the best paper is ordinary ruled foolscap, providing it does not have too smooth a surface, as pencil writing can not be done well on highly calendered paper. The more common the foolscap, therefore, the better, the finest qualities being only suitable for pen and ink, with which shorthand practice should never be attempted. SE I. V .d............&,..^> 3 .4 $...\ 6..y. y...../. / x. \ V_ .^../ 9 40... JL ,...44.^\ ...4&.......4S.. ^i-..r!T 46... O *..+ /.. ^\ .. ...-AC/. ...j u. i/ * /\s\J dj, , ,/C ^- .. 4\t%s+,{ ' M .../e&.I ^5....i ey.,,,(, ..) /^.. KEY I. i, Nigh; 2, nay; 3, knew; 4, pie; 5, pay; 6, chew; 7, Jew; 8, jay; 9, cue; 10, gay; n, bay; 12, by; 13, tie; 14, fie; 15, few; 16, vie; 17, view; 18, sue; 19, sigh; 20, thy; 21, shy; 22, lie; 23, lay; 24, die; 25, day; 26, due; 27, They say May knew my shoe. NOTE i The figures accompanying each word or outline in the above Exercise and Key, and others of this course, are inserted for the student's convenience in referring from the one to the other. They are not to be considered as any part of the phonographic signs. The same is true of all subsequent lessons as well. NOTE 2 Home students should learn every lesson of this course per- fectly enough to write each sign correctly when the key is slowly read aloud to them. This practice of writing from dictation should be done with every Exercise, and done well, before commencing another lesson. The lessons may be learned without such aid, but speed comes more quickly with it. NOTE 3 Students of these lessons, desirous of having their written exercises criticised, or desiring to ask any questions whatever, in regard to the lessons, or relative matters, can address the author, CURTIS HAVEN, Tribune Building, Chicago. LESSON TIMELY SUGGESTIONS. Become perfectly familiar with one lesson before another is attempted. A careful revision each day of the exercises written on the previous one will prove an invaluable aid to the memory. It is only by repetition that you will obtain a complete familiarity with new exercises, therefore do not fail to write every new word or sign at least a dozen times before writing the exercise as a whole. For every hour spent in writing phonography spend a similar one in reading and rereading. This time will be well spent, while a non- compliance with this suggestion may cause infinite trouble in the stu- dent's early attempts at reporting. While practicing the exercises of any lesson, students should form the outlines both carefully and slowly, paying particular attention to the proper formation of shorthand characters, both regarding length and curvature. Careful practicing while learning will bring speed far more quickly than carelessly written exercises, besides bringing with such speed that without which speed is useless legibility. SMALL VISIBLE LETTERS. ' [Pronounced] * Ui [_as in oil.J . A , H * OwjPronounced as in owl. - 87 [Or -Ai a/|_Sh.ort-a as in. atj [Short- e &s i Yayjpr sliort-ia. a,s in. BTI! U By the foregoing list of small signs, students are introduced to six- teen more letters of the Visible Alphabet, the three consonants (Hay, Way and Whay), and thirteen visible vowels each pair of letters slant- ing or curving in the same directions and occurring in same order as their larger prototypes in Lesson I. And, that their distinctions of out- line may be the better memorized, the new list is reproduced in com- parative form in the diagram at top of opposite page. Ai u. A i ' S i W c r ^ D Wh Oi*_ Ow i u e Oo U The letters Hay, Way and Whay, like the letters of first lesson, are used to spell words by position, above, on or beneath the line, signs i to 7, inclusive, indicating invisibly I by position above the line, A OR the line, and U beneath. Do not imagine, because some signs of above list have capital let- ters near them and others small letters, that such distinction is repre- sented by them. There is no occasion for capital letters in Phonogra- phy, any more than in speech, and the use of a small Roman letter op- posite a sign is simply to help the student to remember that that sign has a short sound; and, upon the same principle, a Roman capital letter near a shorthand sign in the shorthand alphabet simply means that such shorthand sign possesses a long or ordinary sound. Write the shorthand letters of the present list ii\ the following directions: E and short e, either upwards or downwards, according to convenience; Ai, Oo, Yay and U, from left to right. The other signs in above list write downwards. The signs representing the sounds of H, W and Wh, must always be called and referred to as Hay, Way and Whay; the signs opposite the small letters i, a and e should be called short-i, short-a and short-e; and the other signs in accordance with the letters opposite them, & or Ai being either pronounced and, or the same as A, excepting" perhaps a trifle more prolonged, like the two a's in the word Baal, though even if A and Ai be pronounced exactly as one sound, no difficulty would arise in their use, as will be seen by future lessons. The signs represented by the small letters i, a, e and u require par- ticular attention, and, explanatory of their use, it is necessary to say that to spell by sound (which is the only way spelling's done in pho- nography), there must be, when writing them, a separate sign for each and every distinct sound; and, as I, A, E and U have each more than one sound, we, therefore, in phonography, when writing each sound, repre- sent it by a separate and distinct letter, the long sound of I, as heard in the word bite, being represented by the first sign in the list heading this lesson; the short sound of i, as heard in the word bit. being indicated by the ninth sign in same list; the ordinary sound of A, as heard in the .word fate, by the third sign in the list; the long sound of Ai, as indi- cated in pronouncing the word fail, by the seventh sign in the list; the long sound of E, as heard in the word feet, by the fourteenth sign in the list; the short sound of e, as in met, by the thirteenth sign; long sound of U, as heard in the vfoxtii pure, by the sixteenth sign, and short-u } as heard in butt, by the fifteenth sign in the list. Examples showing how these signs are used to the consonants are given in this Exercise. By this lesson the student will observe that the vowel sounds of I, A and U are not only represented /'/zvisibly, as described in the last lesson, but also that those sounds have visible letters. The reason for the existence of two ways of representing the same vowel sounds visi- bly and invisibly arises from the fact that both are equally useful and necessary. The -invisible means of representation, as described in Lesson I, is most frequently used always, when, in ordinary words, either of their sounds occur after a consonant, wherein it is possible to place the consonant in position to indicate the presence of a vowel without writing such vowel. But, vowel sounds often happen to be com- plete words of themselves, and therefore unaccompanied by a conso- nant, as with the personal pronoun I, or the article A; or, when a vowel sound would spell a word of itself, as the vowel signs O and U do in the last part of the Exercise to this lesson, wherein the first four words of the sentence "I owe you a new tie" are represented simply by the visible vowels I, O, U and A. Then, again, such sounds are sometimes initials of personal names, as I for Isaac, A for Adam, etc. in which cases invisible representation could not be employed. Sometimes, too, though not frequently, personal names are best written with them, and generally foreign terms. Again, the vowel sounds of I, A and U were, in last lesson, represented invisibly after a consonant, not before one; and, as there often occurs instances in which the vowel sounds are the commencing letters of words and therefore precede the first consonant of such words, it sometimes becomes necessary to write them as in the Exercise to this lesson, signs 8 to 34 inclusive. In those signs, 8 to 34, it will also be seen that such outlines in- variably rest upon the line, that position being the proper one for all letters of the alphabet when not indicating invisible vowels, as well as when indicating the second place invisible vowels. It is only^vhen a first or third position vowel is to be indicated /^/visibly that written characters are placed above, through or beneath the line. Be sure to learn every Exercise strictly in accordance with the four rules preceding the Exercise of Lesson I. Further use of the visible vowels will be explained in next lesson, in which is given the concluding letters of the Visible Alphabet. PEN OR PENCIL. Before closing this lesson, there is one subject, the importance of which the author desires to properly impress upon the minds of his students: It is the necessity of an immediate choice between pen and pencil, in regard to which shall be made use of in the student's phono- graphic writing practice. Student are, of course, at liberty to use both if they choose, and alternate their use as frequently as they wish, but such inconstant use, the student is informed, will greatly delay her or his acquisition of speed. Each instrument differs from the other in facility of execution, and whichever the hand becomes most accustomed to, it writes much quicker and better with. The author prefers a pencil because it can be used under most any or all circumstances, while a pen cannot be employed except under certain favorable conditions. The pencil will glide over the paper much more quickly, and thus affords greater rapidity of execution than the pen, while rapid pencil writing is easier to read than rapidly-made penmarks, for the reason that the use of the pencil avoids the little meaningless ticks and dashes which the pen is almost always certain to leave attached to rapid shorthand writing. It is, however, even better to make constant use of a pen than to be continually changing from one to the other, for the reasons given. EXERCISE II. ,L .. /... ...<&.. ...4-..C ... ...6..'. \ /f..V. ..*&./ /AJ ^Li_ ^5..\ ytf. *) /? r 9 *\x / *) & ^^L. O rt v 5 /c-o...-! Xij...-s. ^oo...x f&y.../ c f~ f .3o..^t* 34-..^ Oi 1 T 1 D , A , /-.. Tchay / J > Hay * Ow >- R - Ai or $> *** Arm or rVem. . Oo _ R ^ Short-i u r ? y - ( Ith or Thee c Way 3 Hway > Short - o ) S 1 7 X /f j Short - e f E _y Ish or Zhee r L n Yay or Short -u V U ^ M w SKort-oo ^N Emb or Emp ^ N 2 Ah s Short -ah w Ing s Aw The above Complete Visible Alphabet of Practical Phonography is composed of twenty-one large letters, about three-sixteenths of an inch in length, and twenty-one small characters, made about one-eight the size of the large ones. Twenty-four of these letters are called con- sonants and eighteen vowels. All the large letters and the small ones Hay, Way and Whay are the consonant letters, the remainder of the small letters being the vowels. Now, for further successful progress in these lessons, it is especially necessary that every sign of the Visible Alphabet be so thoroughly familiar to the eye of the student that any of those signs be known when not presented in the ordinary order of their arrangement, and hence, for memorizing, they are illustrated in comparative form below: CONSONANTS. VOWELS. \ \ C ^ % \ . ^ 1 1 ( c , ) ) i > / J C * r J ^ ^ Z S s ~ w > w Students should practice memorizing the alphabet until the letters in foregoing schedule can be read with considerable facility, both from left to right and right to left, before attempting to learn further exer- cises. Such memorizing will not only give a thorough acquaintance with the names of the signs of the Visible Alphabet, but the separation of the vowels and consonants, as in the schedule, will also serve to im- press upon the mind which signs are consonants and which visible vowels. The use of the vowel signs in spelling personal names is shown in signs 4 to 20 in Exercise, though all spelling, even in personal names, should be done phonetically, viz: R, long- 1 and T, as in sign 4 in Exercise, spells the personal name of Wright, etc., etc., because even in writing personal names, all that is necessary is to write sounds, for, in speaking Mr. Wright's name, we would simply utter the sounds of R, long- 1 and T, and hence we need no more representation in phonography, but we generally write the vowel sign in personal names instead of in- dicating it invisibly, for reasons which will be explained in a future lesson, though in spelling the common words, right or write, we would have indicated the vowel sound by position. The numeral eight is spelled ai-t, as in sentence in sign 45. The proper place for all outlines which do not indicate invisible vowels is on the line of writing, hence, all the proper names of signs 4 to 20 in the Exercise are commenced or rest on the line. It is only when vowels are indicated /^visibly that outlines are commenced above, through or beneath the line, and even then it is only the first consonant which takes position, other consonants taking whatever position is con- venient at the time, as with signs 27 and 33 in Exercise, wherein the second written letter is written out of position simply because the first consonant must have position, and both cannot. It will doubtless be no little satisfaction to the beginner, however he or she may love study, to know that with this lesson terminates all visible alphabetical memorizing, enough means having now been pre- sented to represent, phonographically, any sound of the English lan- guage. The elements of phonography being now within the grasp of the learner, future lessons will be entirely taken up with interesting contractions and practical application of the system. THE CIRCLES S AND Z. Rapidity in writing shorthand frequently necessitates, for the representation of the oft-recurring sounds of S and Z, a much shorter method than that found in our Visible Alphabet. A small light circle is therefore often used to represent the hissing sound of S, and a shaded small circle to indicate Z under similar cir- cumstances. These circles are joined to other consonants by writing them on the most convenient side of curved letters, and on the right or upper side of straight ones, though they may be placed at either end of any letter, as in following diagrams, the circle being read where written: St 3k $th SI in. 33 Rs Ths Ls Ms & The superiority of these circles in point of speed, over the long signs for S or Z, is a fact which will be more or less appreciated and taken advantage of by the student. But, lest there be a disposition to do away entirely with the original signs representing these sounds in the Visible Alphabet, it is necessary to state that there are instances wherein the signs for S and Z, as written in the Visible Alphabet, must be employed. They are: First. When either the sound of S or Z constitute the only con- sonant of a word, as in sign 21 of this Exercise. Second. When either of the sounds of S or Z is the first con- sonant in a word, and is preceded by an invisible vowel, as in sign 22. Third. When an invisible vowel sound terminates a word in which either S or Z happen to be the last consonant. Signs 26, 27, 33, 35 and 36. Under the above three rules, the long S or Z of the Visible Alphabet must be used, and in the second and third rules, the student, when reading, has an infallible guide whereby to determine when an in- visible vowel precedes or follows either S or Z in a consonant combina- tion. In other words, when he sees the S or Z of the Visible Alphabet, beginning such a combination, he knows an invisible vowel must be read before and in conjunction with it, and that, when either of those long letters ends such a combination, there is an invisible vowel following it, as part of the word. Under all circumstances not covered by above three rules, use the circle S or Z wherever possible. For instance, when either the sound of S or Z begin a combination, with no vowel before it, use the circle as in signs 23, 29, 30, 37, 38 and 40 in Exercise. When the sounds of S or Z end any combination, with no vowel sound after, use the circles, as in signs 24, 25, 28, 32, 34, 39 and 41 in Exercise. Compare sign 22, indicating a preceding vowel, and sign 23, with no vowel before the S. Also compare sign 25, indicating no final vowel sound, with sign 26, indicating the final vowel E sound of Y. Also compare sign 34, maz, spelled in shorthand with no final vowel sound, and sign 35, ma-zy, showing the final E sound of Y by full sized Z. Just here the student may ask how it is known that the vowel sound is E following long-S in signs 26 and 27, or following Z in signs 33, 35 and 36. The answer to this is, that in English the final sound of such words ending in Y is always pronounced nearly like the vowel E, and therefore all that is necessary is to remember that when a vowel sound ends a word whose last visible letter is S or Z, the shorthander is to write the long S or Z, as in the instances just named, and when he or she reads those letters, to pronounce after them the vowel sound of E, when the key to the outline will be at once evident. The E in case, (sign 24), race (sign 25), sire (sign 30), maze (sign 34), etc., is of course silent and not considered in shorthand spelling. A double-sized light circle, written alone or joined to other letters in accordance with the rule governing the small circles, represents the sounds ses, sez, size, zes, zez, etc. See signs 42, 43 and 44 in Exercise. This double-sized circle must not be mistaken for double-s (ss) in the English spelling of the word lass, etc. In phonography no letters are wasted and lass and kindred words terminating with double-s, are spelled quite as legibly, and much more economically, thus: 1-a-s, lass. These small and large circles are joined to the letters R and Arm in the same manner and upon the same sides as those circles are joined to K or Gay. See signs 24, 25 and 30. This is no more than proper, for R and Arm are written from left to right, as K and Gay are, and should, therefore, be treated similarly in this respect. This rule the student will have frequent cause for recalling in future lessons and he or she should bear it well in mind and on all occasions where junctions are made with, or circles added to, the letters R and Arm, such junctures and additions must be made to R and Arm in precisely the same manner that they would be added to K or Gay. When joining shaded circle-Z to letters, shade most convenient way. C, Q AND X. There are three letters which students who have had but little experience in spelling by sound will look in vain for among the letters of our Visible Alphabet, viz. : the Roman letters C, Q and X. The Roman C is not contained therein, because, in spelling by sound, phonographers do not need the help of that letter, the soft sound of C, as heard in the word city, being represented in phonography by the phonographic S, that word being spelled sit-e, as in sign 29 in Exercise; while the hard sound of C, as heard in case, is represented by K, and that word spelled k-a-s, as in sign 24 in Exercise. The soit and hard sounds of the Roman letter G are similarly dealt with in phonography, J being used to spell such words as gypsy and sage (thus )\]>-se,gypsey; s-a-j, sage) as in signs 27 and 31 in Exercise; the hard sound of the Roman letter G, as heard in the word game, being in- dicated phonographically by the letter Gay of our Visible Alphabet, as seen in sign 28 in Exercise. The letters Q and X are not incorporated in our Visible Alphabet, because those letters are not needed in spelling by sound, and are never so used, they being themselves composed of more than one simple sound and therefore made by the union of other letters and really spelled thus: K-u, Q; short-e, K and circle-S, X; as in sentence 45 in Exercise, in which sentence is also shown how to represent the letter C as the initial of a person's name (by spelling it thus: s-e, C) which is the plan upon which all initials are represented in shorthand writing, as is fully explained in the last lesson of this course. HOLDING THE PENCIL. In Lesson I the student is requested, when writing phonography, to hold the pen or pencil between the first and second fingers, merely keeping it in place with the thumb. Most phonographers employ this method, though there are a few who profess to prefer the ordinary pen- manship style, saying that a special method for shorthand writing is sim- ply affectation. This is a mistake. The philosophy of the matter is, that in ordinary penmanship the letters all slant in one direction, and are written always either downward from the right or upward from the left, and hence the regular penmanship manner of holding the pen is de- cidedly preferable in ordinary writing; but in writing phonographically the shorthand characters are formed in such a variety of directions, downward from the right, perpendicularly, horizontally, etc., etc., that a special position of the hand, if one would make the characters easily and rapidly, is a requisite which is best secured by holding the pen or pencil between the first and second fingers, by which plan the hand is less liable to become cramped from excess of work. EXERCISE III. KEY III. i, rye; 2, ray; 3, rue; 4, Wright; 5, Coyle; 6, Gale; 7, Coke; 8, Bower; 9, Bain; 10, Roote; n, Rich; 12, Mack; 13, Dodd; 14, Wren; 15, Peel; 16, Kurr; 17, Cuba; 18, Foote; 19, Shah; 20, Bawn; 21, say; 22, ask; 23, sack; 24, case; 25, race; 26, racy; 27, Gypsey; 28, gas; 29, city; 30, sire; 31, sage; 32, dies; 33, dizzy; 34, maze; 35, mazy; 36, lazy; 37, same; 38, save; 39, vice; 40, safe; 41, face; 42, faces; 43, paces; 44, races; 4-, Miss C. Q. X. Cook buys eight laces a day. LESSON IV. ADDITIONAL USE OF THE VISIBLE VOWELS. In words wherein visible vowels are necessary, and where the junc- ture of a visible vowel with the required consonant or consonants would be difficult or impossible to accomplish, a sign representing another sound of the same Roman vowel is substituted. For instance, it would be impossible to recognize the straight sign for long I, when joined to the letter P, and yet to properly read the word Pine, when it is a person's name, it is necessary to visibly represent the vowel sound. To do this we join the sign for short-i, and, in order to show that we in- tend the sound meant to be long-I, we thicken short-i, as it is shown in sign 27 in Exercise, which thickening tells us that it is substituted for long-I. Similarly, as in signs 28 and 29 in Exercise, other light vowels may be substituted to represent the long ones by thickening, excepting the sign for short-a, which is not needed to be substituted for long, ordi- nary A, because the sound for Ai can be better employed, as in sign 24 in Exercise, though as A and Ai represent sounds so very similar that most people make no difference in their pronunciation, it is not neces- sary to thicken either A or Ai when substituted for each other, either sign being used for the other without particular indication. In instances where the long sounds of O and Oo need to be shown, but will not join, the signs for their short sounds are used, and bowed in the oppo- site direction to show substitution, short-o being turned around in the form of a heavy letter Way, and short-oo, like a heavy short-u, as in signs 33 and 34 in Exercise. Short-oo, when made in the shape of a short-u, will not be mistaken for that letter; because, when the sign for long-U is substituted for the short one it is only shaded at one end of the curve, while short-oo is thick all over. Compare sign 29 with sign 34 in Exercise. For a similar reason short-u, when shaded to indicate the sound of long-U, will not be mistaken for the substituted short-oo. Compare signs 30 and 34. When Oi is required to be added to B and similar shaped charac- ter?, it may be bowed in the shape of short-a, as in sign 35 in Exercise, and being written heavy will not be mistaken for short-a, as short-a is never thickened when substituted for any other sound of A. To accommodate the downward stroke of Ow, the letter Hay is written upward, as in sign 25 in Exercise, but as Hay should generally be written downward, Ow would have to be written upward upon such other occasions. Ah may be used for Aw by thickening beginning stroke. Sign 31. Ah and short-ah may be substituted for each other without thicken- ing, as in sign 26 in Exercise. The sign for Ah or short-ah may be substituted for A or short-a in instances where the regular sign for A or short-a would not join, as in sign 32 in Exercise. This substitution of the vowel signs for one another, as shown in signs 24 to 34 in our Exercise, as above described, illustrate instances which will, however, very seldom occur, and need not cause any fear of confliction on the part of the student. The vowel signs will, in general, join easily when required, as they do in last lesson, without substitutes. If students prefer, they need not join the vowels. COALESCING VISIBLE VOWELS. Besides the preceding described uses for the visible vowels, they are also employed in instances where two vowel sounds together ter- minate a word, as with the vowel sounds of a and e pronounced ter- minating the word payee. Sign 18 in Exercise. In such case and others illustrated in the Exercise, it would be impossible to invisibly represent two sounds by one preceding consonant sign, and a visible vowel cannot indicate an invisible one, nor a consonant indicate one invisible and one visible vowel at the same time. Hence, the necessity and wisdom in writing both vowel sounds wnen they together terminate a word. In some instances, however, as in such words as Uriah, Noah, etc., the final Roman ah possesses a sort of neutral sound, in which the aspirate sound of H seems to take so important a part, the sound being eh, that, in such cases, especially if the sign for short-e would not make a perfect juncture, the sign for Hay may be joined terminating the outline, providing Hay be written upwards when so joined, as in signs 21 and 22, etc. in Exercise. This use of the letter Hay will not cause it to clash with its ordinary use as a consonant, because, as a consonant, it would not occur following a visible vowel, and also because of the fact that it is written downwards as a consonant, while, in the representation of i-ah and o-ah, it is written upwards. I-ah and O-ah are written the same when they occur preceding a word, as in Owen, where the sound is O-eh-n. If Owen were to be written simply O-n, as some suppose, it might be read as Own. Therefore, indicate the eh sound, as in sign 23. It will be noticed in writing the names Uriah, Noah, etc., that no provision is made in phonography to indicate capital letters. In other words, the capital letter N in Noah (sign 22), is represented by the same sign which is used to indicate the small letter n in kneii?, sign 3 in Lesson I. This principle is founded upon the fact that, as people do n<^t indicate capital letters when they speak, it is, therefore, equally unnecessary to represent them in phonography, and as phonographers write from sound entirely, no confusion can arise in reading one's short- hand notes even without capital letter indication. VISIBLE VOWEL JUNCTURES. As it is in only a very few words of our language wherein it is necessary to write vowels, the student will seldom be required to write such cumbrous outlines as predominate this lesson, vowels in general being indicated invisibly, as in Exercise of first and succeeding lessons. The principal object of this lesson is to show students how to join vowels when necessary, in personal names and initials, and though, in writing the latter, the vowel signs should always be employed for reasons which students will understand better as they progress, yet, even in personal names, if students are thoroughly familiar with the personality they are writing about, they need not insert vowels unless they so desire, but simply write the consonant outline in position to indicate the vowel, just as common words are written phonographically. THE INVISIBLE ALPHABET. In Lesson I was explained the application of the main principle of the Invisible Alphabet of Haven's Practical Phonography, in indicating the vowel sounds of I, A and U invisibly by writing a consonant, after which one of those vowel sounds occurred, either above, on, through or beneath the line of writing, according to whichever vowel was intended at the time, and such principle has been used throughout the Exercise of each lesson preceding this, but the positions of the consonants were given no technical names. The student now being prepared for further explanation concerning the entire Invisible Alphabet, it becomes neces- sary to state that those three positions above, on, through or beneath the line of writing are known respectively as the first, second and third positions, and the vowels represented by such positions are known as first-place vowels, second-place vowels or third place vowels, the sound of I, therefore, when represented invisibly, being a first-place vowel; A., a second-place vowel, and U, a third-place vowel. But those three vowels are not the only ones so represented and so named. On the contrary, the entire eighteen vowel sounds of the English language are divided into those three classes first-place, second-place, and third-place vowels and are represented invisibly by those three positions only,in accordance with the table at top of next page: FIRST PLACE VOWELS SECOND PLACE E I Long sound, as heard in beet, Short sound, as heard in b^t. Long or dual sound, as heard in b/'te, Short sound as heard in bit. I ,^y j The diphthongal sound, heard in ( the words boil and ouster. f Long English sounds, heard in pate or pair, . ! Sounds of AH, heard in pa and ask. I Broad sound of AW, heard in pall, [_ Short sound, as heard in Pat. To indicate these sounds, write the con- sonants or a ( word in the f FIRST POSITION, j above the line. PLACE VOWELS O U OO Long sound, as heard in p^le, Short sound, as heard in P^lly. I j Long sound, as heard in p?/re, | Short sound, as heard in pwtty. Long sound, as heard in ioo\, Short sound, as heard in ioot. /-VTX7 ) Diphthongal sound, as heard in the words f^zc/1 and allow. To indicate these sounds, consonants should occupy SECOND POSITION, resting on the line. For these, place con- sonants in THIRD POSITION. through or be- neath the line. Read the above table over until well understood, but it is not necessary to memorize it entire. Simply to memorize the main letters E, I, Oi; A, O; U, Oo and Ow; and their positions, is sufficient to im- press the positions of the other sounds upon the mind, because the other sounds are merely variations of those eight. Nor need students fear that the use of only three positions for the representation of eighteen different vowel sounds will serve to perplex them, when reading their own notes, if correctly written. All profes- sional shorthand writers omit those eighteen sounds, representing their omission by three positions only, and to illustrate how comparatively easy it is to read by position, even with such a number of invisible vowel sounds to choose between, let us analyze the first word in our Exercise. The fir t sign in our Exercise happens to be an F above the line, which position, we are told by above schedule, represents the indication of either of the three sounds E, I or Oi after the letter F; therefore, such sign reads, according to the rule, either f-e, fee; f-i, fie; or f-oi, foi. But, as f.'i is no word at all, we have but two words to choose between, fee or fie. In this instance the word intended is fee, because the Key to the Exercise says so. But should there have been no Key it would not have mattered which word the pupil transcribed it as, because the words in this Exercise are in no wise dependent on each other. Indeed, in this and some subsequent lessons, wherein the words of the Exercise are isolated, pupils may frequently, though working according to rule, interpret words differently from the Key, as they might have done with fee, in this Exercise. This must not, -however, lead them to suppose that this will always be their experience. On the contrary, should this letter F have occured (in the position it occupies in this in- stance) within a sentence, no doubt about its meaning would have arisen, because other words preceding or following this particular word in the same sentence would have designated its meaning at once. A person would not be apt to say "A lawyer'syfc, " or "Fee, fee, for shame!" In sign 2 in Exercise the position adds either A or O to F, making either fay or foe, but as the Key says foe, read it so, especially as there is no such modern word as fay. Sign 3 would read as either f-u few; f-oo, foo; or f-ow, fow; but as foo and fow are no words, we read the outline as few; so that, as a general [rule, only one word could be made out of such outlines anyway, and where more than one, the context shows which one. Where such would not be the case the visible vowel would be written as in signs 1 2 to 14 in Exercise. Sometimes a preceding vowel is written, and the final vowel indicated by position, as in signs 15 to 17 the preceding vowel a in allow being written and the L placed through the line to indicate ow after the L, spelling a-l-ow, allow, etc., etc. IMPORTANCE OF SPELLING BY SOUND. The main thing is not to forget that phonography means writing by sound. No attention should be paid to ordinary spelling. Keep in mind the fact that the invisible vowel Ow does not mean the letters O and W, and can not be used to spell the word know. The Invisible Alphabet Ow is the sound of Ow, as heard in such words as bough, which word is spelled phonetically b-ow, bough, as in sign 6 in Exercise. The word know is spelled n-o, know; shows, sh-o-s, as in signs 8 and 44. Again, do not seek to indicate the silent letter e occurring at the end of such English-spelled words as foe, chase, sale, etc., signs 2, 38 and 40 in Exercise. F and o spell foe phonographically and chay-s, chase, or S, long-A and 1, sale, just as correctly as speech can utter them. Do not, for an instant, forget that it is the phonographic reporter's duty simply to write the sounds which drop from the speaker's lips, not to spell words. For, if all the sounds of a speaker's utterance are cor- rectly placed on paper, the speech has actually been placed there, and simply by pronouncing the sounds ther,on, in their order, the speech is heard again, and can easily be transcribed iflto ordinary spelling for the use of those who do not know the shorthand. Once get the sound cor- rect and the sense is there also, for it is only sounds we hear when we speak to one another, and what is more useful or more used than speech? People do not spell nor indicate silent or capital letters when speaking, which fact is the prime reason why it is not necessary to do either in phonography. The simple presentation of the seven small letters, i c u x-1 f-e, when addressing a lady or child, would be under- stood quite as readily as if you had written the words which those sounds represent, and had spelled and capitalized them into the bargain. The full sentence, "I see you excel, Effie," may be better English spell- ing, but it means no more than the seven letters above printed. Spelling by sound always saves time, and though it may seem strange to the beginner that it makes our shorthand Visible Alphabet longer than the ordinary A, B, C, or Roman alphabet, yet such devia- tion in length is really only a seeming "one, as, in the Roman alphabet, several letters have more than one sound. The reason our shorthand alphabet commences with P, B, T and D, instead of A, B, C, is because the phonographic alphabet is arranged to suit the order of the signs, instead of their name. POSITION VOCALIZATION. As in this lesson are represented words having two joined conso- nants, it is necessary to state that, in general, the invisible vowel sound is indicated by the first consonant of a word, no matter what position the other consonants may happen to be in, as in sign 48, the invisible vowel O in ropes being indicated by the position of the first consonant R, and not by the second consonant. This is the rule. But like most rules in life it, of necessity, has an exception, but only one: That exception existing in instances where the small consonants, Hay, Way and Whay, or the horizontal consonants, K, Gay, M and N, are followed by a de- scending letter, as in signs 51 to 62, inclusive, in which case the invisible vowel is determined by the position of the second consonant, instead of the first. But it is only when the second consonant is a descending one that the exception applies, as otherwise the regular rule governs Way, K, Gay, etc., as well as other consonants. In words of two syllables, such as berry and. funny (signs 64 and 65), the concluding letter Y is pronounced somewhat like the short-i in bit, or like an E. Those words, then, in spelling by sound, must be spelled ber-e, berry; fun-e, funny; and, being spelled phonographically with those sound letters, they must be written accordingly; hence the final letter Y in those and similarly constructed words is written with the E sound of Y indicated invisibly, but not by position, because not necessary. It is impossible, in writing words of two or more syllables, always to give each syllable the proper position required by its particular vowel. As a general rule, only one syllable in a word can be accommo- dated in this respect, and the syllable thus honored should be either the first, as in sign 65, or the syllable containing the most conspicuous vowel, which is generally the accented one. There are instances, how- ever, in which it is not necessary to apply this rule. Those instances are found in words, the phonetic outlines of which are so extended that their meaning is sufficiently distinct without recourse to any especially significant position, and which are, therefore, written in the second po- sition, the easiest position in which to write. Sign 67 in Exercise. It may be asked what rule will determine whether sign 65 in Exer- cise spells fun or funny, since both words contain the same consonants, F and N. To this the author replies that each alphabetical conso- nant may indicate an invisible vowel after it, and there being two full- sized consonants (F and N) in funny, there may also be two vowels indi- cated, one after each consonant, as there happens to be (f u and n-e), which, vowels and consonants, spell funny. Fun would have been written with only one full sized consonant (an F), the N in fun being indicated in another manner, the explanation of which is reserved for future lessons. It would be unprofitable to students were the author to fake up space in the descriptive part of a lesson to presuppose instances ahfad of the principles already described in the lesson. And, furthermore, such a method, ia addition to being a waste of time, would have no other effect than to confuse. It is, therefore, best for students not to worry themselves about future possibilities wondering whether such a manner of writing a word will or will not cause connection with other words not in the lessons, etc., etc. Better learn the lessons just as they are, reading the Exercise as the Key says, and writing words in the Key as the Exercise directs, and the student will be sure not to go astray. Remember that everything cannot be explained in one lesson, and that if students will be satisfied to take instruction as it comes, they will find all their questions answ red and all their conundrums solved by the time the last lesson is reached, while most questions will solve themselves as one progresses. Students must expect, at first, a little difficulty in reading purely consonant outlines, but this difficulty will diminish with each lesson, and entirely disappear with practice in reading. In sign 42 in Exercise, the big circle-Ses is written above the line for the word cease, and in sign 43, the small circle-s is also added inside the large circle to make ceases, Additional practice in joining the circle-S and Ses is given in signs 37 to 50, inclusive. The word necessity, sign 65, is spelled ne-ses-te, as it is easy to read it in that shape, while such outline is easily written. Accustom yourself to holding your pencil between the first and second fingers, and not between the thumb and first finger. The latter may be correct for ordinary penmanship, where the letters all slant in the same direction, but in shorthand the letters slant in so many ways, many of them backward and perpendicular, that to accurately write such shorthand characters it is necessary to hold the pencil as advised. EXERCISE IT. ^ ^ ..40..C..4.*. ..42...4?..44 ^...45.^.46 ....... .^l..^J...^3..]...^4.:..^^ 's&Mb^Q.^ ........ ^^ 6 KEY IV. i, Fee; 2, foe; 3, few; 4, joy; 5, dough; 6, bough; 7, knee; 8, know; 9, thou; 10, key; n, cow; 12, caw; 13, low; 14, law; 15, allow; 16, ago; 17, ague; 18, payee; 19, snowy; 20, Louis; 21, Uriah; 22, Noah; 23, Owen; 24, Dale; 25, Howe; 26, Parr; 27, Pine; 28, Penn; 29, Rugg; 30, Buelah; 31, Shaw; 32, Pattie; 33, Doe; 34, Hook; 35, Boyle; 36, Katie; 37, soup; 38, chase; 39, sash; 40, sale; 41, seize; 42, cease; 43, ceases; 44, shows; 45, nice; 46, muses; 47, teams; 48, ropes; 49, reaches; 50, rushes; 51, weighed; 52, weed; 53, wooed; 54, whit; 55, hate; 56, hut; 57, hit; 58, hop; 59, nip; 60, nap; 61, myth; 62, mouth; 63, ferry; 64, berry; 65, funny; 66, necessity; 67, customary; 68, Ripe peaches are wholesome. LESSON V. THE BEGINNING HOOKS. While the letter Way is quite correctly joined to Ing, as in sign 2 in Exercise, there is also, in some instances, a much easier and more rapid manner of joining Way or Whay to N and to some other letters. This is by running the letter Way into the letter to which it is joined, without showing point of juncture, as in signs i, 7, 8, etc. in Exercise, forming what is known as the Way or Whay hook, it indicating the sound of Whay as well. The hook, it will be noticed, is always shaded upon the commencing stroke and accommodates itself to the shape of the main letter to which it is joined, being, therefore, joined to the full-sized letters L, M, etc, in the most convenient manner, which though in the case of L (sign 9), makes the hook somewhat resemble U, yet it will never be mistaken to be any other character than what it is, for the reason that U would not be written backwards, as the Way and Whay hook is in these cases. The letter Whay can also be sub- stituted for Way, to facilitate junctures, as in signs 3 to 5 in Exercise. This Way or Whay hook is what is known as a beginning hook, be- cause it is placed at the beginning of outlines. There are other beginning hooks of still more value as abbreviating principles, but which, for special reasons, are best classed as double, triple and quad- ruple consonants. Below we explain the DOUBLE CONSONANTS. A small beginning hook, written on the left side of the upright and slanting straight characters, P, B, T, D, etc., and on the under side of the horizontal ones, K, Gay, etc., indicates the addition of R to the full-sized consonants to which it is joined. See signs ii, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21 and 50 in Exercise. A similar hook, also be- ginning outlines, but written on the upper side of horizontal and left side of upright straight characters, adds L to the full-sized consonants to which it is joined. See signs numbered 12, 14, 16, 18, 2o and 49 in Exercise. Although, in writing these combinations, which are denomi- nated the Per and Pel series of Double Consonants, the signs are com- menced at the hooks, yet, in reading them, the L or R hook, as the case may be, is read after the consonant to which it is joined. These com- binations must not ba called p-r, p-1, etc., but as one sound, Per, Pel, etc. While these L and R hooks are comparatively easily added to straight letters, such is not entirely the case with the curved consonants. For instance, though the L hook may readily be added to Ith, as in sign 38 in Exercise, yet it would be very awkward to add an R hook to Ith. Similarly with other curves. We can add an L hook to an F, as in sign 34. but not an R hook conveniently. We can add an R hook to V, sign 36; to long S, sign 40; or to Ish, sign 42; but we cannot conveniently add an L hook to V, long S or Ish. We therefore employ this rule: Add the beginning hooks to curved letters the same way as to the straight letters, when convenient; when not convenient, shade the curved letters to indicate the hook instead of writing the hook. This shading would indicate the additio i of R to F, Ith and L, signs 35, 39 and 44; and would add L to V or Ish, signs 37 and 43. That is, the shading indicates the hook letter that cannot be easily attached. The L hook is not added to L, and it cannot be added to long-Z, nor should long-S be thickened to indicate L, because thickening long-S would make it look like a long-Z. It will be seen, by reference to signs 52, 53 and 54, that the L is indicated to Ish in two ways, due to the fact that the sign Ish may be written either upwards or downwards in junctures with other full sized characters, though, when alone, it is only written downward. On one plan, signs 52 and 53, the hook, being a beginning one, is, of course, joined at the bottom of the letter, Ish therein being written upwards and begun at the lower end, the hook being'attached the same as to K ''in sign 51. In the outlines in signs 52 and 53, is also another full-sized letter Ing in 52 and F in 53 which show the direction in which the Ish is written, but, where the only full sized letter written is Ish, then it would be impossible to tell in which direction Ish is written unless we adhere to the rule to write Ish downwards always when it is written alone, and in such case we must shade Ish to indicate the addi- tion of L, as in sign 43; also whenever Ish is written downwards, no matter how many letters we attach to it, as in shellac, sign 54. The R hook is added to M and the L hook to N on the most con- venient side of those two letters, which would be the same sides as they would be added to straight letters. Compare sign 45 with sign 13 in Exercise and sign 47 with sign 51. To add L to M and R to N, we thicken M or N and retain the same hooks, as in signs 46 and 48 in Exercise. This is done because, if we did not retain the hooks, the thickening of M and N would cause them to be mistaken for Mb or Mp and Ing. Therefore, the student need entertain no fear that sign 46 will ever be mistaken for Mbr, Mpr, Mbl, or sign 48 for Ingr, or Ingl, for the hooks R or L are never added to Ing, nor Emp, nor are they in- tended to be added to any of the small characters of the Visible Alphabet. Signs 47, 48, 49, 51, etc., need not be, by the careful pupil, con- fused with Way-n, Way-ing, Way-r, etc., as the latter are written as in signs i, 2, 7, 4, etc., with either a shaded hook or letter Way or Whay. Rarer, sign 33, is simply the word rare, with another R added to it. Although the Per and Pel series of double consonants should be ordinarily pronounced as though the invisible vowel E existed between the P and L or P and R, etc., yet this is done merely for the sake of appreciating the double character of their consonants, for any other vowel may, at times, occur between the P-l and P-r, etc., as with chair, sign 19. Furthermore, these double consonants, Per, Pel, etc., may not possess any vowel sound between them, but indicate it after them, as with sign 21, in which the invisible vowel sound Oo follows the double consonant Dr. When, however, there are two separate vowel sounds in a word, as in the two-syllabled word dowry (spelled phono- graphically d-ow-re), the hook R should not be employed, the conson- ants of the word being written out in full, as in sign 22, in order to clearly indicate the presence of two vowel sounds. The student should particularly bear in mind that, although, in writing these Per and Pel series of double consonants, they are com- menced at the hooks, yet, in reading them, the R or L hook, as the case may be, is read after the main consonant; therefore, in reading Shel, the second syllable in facial, sign 53, the full sized consonant Ish is read before the hook L, and the hook L last; thus, fa-shel; not fa-lish. Below is given a table of the double consonants: Ber f ytQ\. ,^Ttl(iT l\er - c B^mel Kel Mer ff-N tf> Mel er Vel \ Ter i t Tel TKer ( C TKel Der 1 [ Del E$er 5 r Cher / f Chel 3Jb.er J - J j. | Jer / f Jel ler r ^ r TRIPLE AND QUADRUPLE CONSONANTS. The time-saving principle of double consonants has just been explained; but there are two still greater consonant combinations, known as triple and quadruple series. The triple series is of two kinds the Pier and Prel series and the Sper and Spel series, both of which are illustrated at top of next page: Rler f ^ Rrel 3rer ^ e/ Srel Rmler Vrel 3ver 1 ^ Svel TKler C c THrel Stiver f e Sthel SKler D 3 Shrel 3sJier 3 j 3skel Mler c\ c\ Mrel 3mer <^ <5\ 3mel Nler ^ Krel Pner *S ^ Sn.el Tlie above Pier and Prel series of triple consonants are made by en- larging the hooks of the Per and Pel series of double consonants. See signs 23 to 32 Inclusive in Exercise. This is merely the adding of both beginning hooks R and L, on same side of the letter at one time. The written hook itself remains the R hook or L, hook according to which side it is on, the other hook being read between the the full sized letter and the hook, the fact that the written hook is far away from the full sized letter, indicating the insertion of the invisible hook. Pronounce the full sized letter first, invisible consonant next, and written hook last. The Sper and Spel series of triple consonants in foregoing plate is formed by converting into a circle the R hook of the straight letters of the Per and Pel series of double consonants (signs 55, 58 and 59 in- clusive); by writing the S circle inside the L, hook of the straight letters of the Per and Pel series of double consonants (signs 56, 57 and 60) and inside both the L, and R hooks of the curved letters, Signs 63, 65 and 66 inclusive. Where curved letters are only shaded to add ~L or R, the circle S is added naturally, as in signs 6r, 62 and 64. Sper, Sjer, Sker, etc., (signs 55, 58 and 59), will not clash with Sp, Sj, Sk, etc.; because in Sper, Sjer, Sker, etc., the circle is written on the left and lower sides of the main consonant to add R, while in the latter, the circle S is on its natural side. Compare signs 55, 58 and 59 of this lesson with 29, 31 and 23 of Exercise to Lesson III. The quadruple series of consonants, like the triple, are of two kinds, the Spier and Sprel series and the Sesper series. The Spier and Sprel series are formed by adding a circle S inside the hook of the Pier and Prel series of double consonants. See signs 67 to 71 inclusive and the following diagram: 0rler CP^ e^ 3rrel iSrmler ** ex* I Skier G- e_ $krel v- -/ I rt -y ^^"^ /^ ^/^*"?^ I L^W -t ^ * ^^ ^MM t**f* * ^ * $pler ^\ \ Sprcl Stler < \ \ 3i>rel 5tler $irel 3dler I I ^Sdrel Sckler / / 3cK^e" 3jler ? /* Sjrel jSmler Snler O SHer t 3vlcr ^ $tKler C Smrel (L/ Sfrel 3sKI er In the cut below, we illustrate the beginning hooks from double to quadruple series, so that the student may intelligently compare them: Ter Tier 3rer 3rler Tel Trel Krel The Sesper series of quadruple consonants are formed by convert- ing into a large sized circle the R hook of the straight letters of the Per series of double consonants. The circle is written twice the size of the circle S, and is really the Ses circle written upon the R hook side of the double consonants, as per diagram below: Ses-ter .-per Ses-: The Sesper circle cannot be added to the curved letters F, V, etc., and therefore, when used, will never be mistaken for Ses-p, Ses-t, etc., because, as with the preceding explanation of the difference between Sper and Sp, the double consonants Sesper, Sester, etc., are written^ on the reverse side of the P, T, etc., to that occupied by Sesp, etc. Sign 77. In writing these triple and quadruple consonants, they are always commenced at the circle, when it accompanies them, and at the hook when the combinations have no commencing circle. In reading the latter class (the Pier and Prel series) the main consonant is read first, ler or rel last, as with the R and L hooks in the Per and Pel series of double consonants; but, in reading all combinations beginning with a circle (the Sper and Spel, Spier and Sprel series) the circle S or Ses is read first, the main consonants P, B, etc., next, and the hook or other letter of the combination last. This explanation refers only to consonants. Invisible vowels may intervene between any consonants, as in settle (sign 57), wherein an invisible vowel is indicated between the S and T of Stel, in which case S is read first, invisible vowel E next and Tel last. No invisible vowel, however, can be indicated preceding the circle S or Ses, because, as explained in Lesson III , the long sign for S, as in the Visible Alphabet, is written when it is desired to indicate an invisible vowel preceding S or Z, when S or Z begin outlines. In further explanation of the use of these triple and quadruple conso- nants, it is necessary to state that not only may an invisible vowel exist between any two consonants of these combinations, as with settle above instanced, but any vowel may be indicated, as in sprawl (sign 68), and, furthermore, as many invisible vowels may exist between the conso- nants as there are consonants to read them betweefc, as instance the case of quadruple consonant Skier, which, in the position represented in the Exercise (sign 71) spells secular, thereby indicating an invisible vowel between the S and K, one between K and L, and one between L and R. It is best not to bother about vowels in this lesson. Learn the words without question, as shown in the Key, so long as the consonant combinations are well understood. The vowel sounds will be found to take care of themselves as you progress. There are instances, as in signs 86 and 87, straggler .an.& stickler, where the full form of hooks cannot be written, but signs thus slighted will be quite easily read by the student alter becoming somewhat acquainted with them. Do not suppose, however, that sign 84 is simi- larly slighted, for the word descry is perfectly formed, thus: d-skr-i, desry. V. J^ .^ KEY V. i, Wan; 2, wing; 3, wave; 4, week; 5, wag; 6, warm; 7, wire; 8, windy; 9, whale; 10, whistle; u,rare; 12, rule; 13, cry; 14, goal; 15, pry; 1 6, blow; 17, try; 18, deal; 19, chair; 20, jail; 21, drew; 22, dowry; 23, roller; 24, rural; 25, collar; 26, girl; 27, pillar; 28, barrel; 29, dealer; 30, trial; 31, jailer; 32, Charles; 33, rarer; 34, fall; 35, fare; 36, veer; 37, vale; 38, Ethel; 39, their; 40, icer; 41, user; 42, share; 43, shawl; 44, lore; 45, more; 46, mill; 47, nail; 48, near; 49, rail; 50, armor; 51, kill; t/ 52, shilling; 53, facial; 54, shellac; 55, spree; 56, sable; 57, settle; 58, sieger; 59, soaker; 60, saggle; 61, safer; 62, civil; 63, savor; 64, slur; 65, sinner; 66, small; 67, sabler; 68, sprawl; 69, settler; 70, sidereal; 71, secular; 72, buckler; 73, tunnel; 74, tippler; 75, treacle; 76, strainer; 77, sisterly; 78, cobbler; 79, corporal; 80, grammar; Si, viper; 82, labor; 83, leers; 84, descry; 85, straggle; 86, straggler; 87, stickler; 88, George tore May's silk dress. LESSON VI. FINAL HOOKS. A small final hook, written on the right-hand side of upright and slanting straight characters, and on the upper side of horizontal ones, represents the addition of either F or V. Signs i, 3, 5, 7 and 9, in Exercise. S or Z may be added to this hook by writing the circle within the hook. Signs 13, 15, 17, etc. This F or V hook is not in- tended to be added to the curved letters F, V, etc., although some writers use a small shaded final hook on curves to represent F or V, as in signs 41 and 46. A similarly sized final hook, written on the left-hand side of upright and slanting straight letters, on the lower side of horizontal ones, and added in the most convenient manner to curved letters, represents the addition of N. Signs 2, 4, 6, 8 and 37 in Exercise. The S or Z circle is added to this hook, on curved letters, by writing the circle within the hook (signs 40, 43 and 50); and to the straight consonants, by converting the N hook into a complete circle (signs 14, 16, 18, 20 and 22), in a manner similar to that by which S is added to Per in Lesson V. This conversion of the N hook into a circle, forms what is called the Ns circle, which need not be mistaken for the plain circle S, because the original circle S is written on the right hand side of straight, upright, and the upper side of horizontal characters. The following cut illustrates these hooks exactly and also the manner in which the S and Ns circles are added to them. R-n Rm-n. K-n Gay-n P-n B-n T-n D-n Ch-n J-rx J J J J J J D-TLS Ch-nS J-n$ B4 T-* X \9 X V L I I L J- J -H VS fs V3 The Ns circle may be enlarged to represent the sounds of Nses or Nza>, signs 51, 53, etc, the Nses circle really being a Ses circle written on the N hook side. Neither the Ns circle nor the Nses circle are ever added to curved letters. A large sized final hook, written on the same side of full sized con- sonants as that to which the F or V hook is added, represents the ad- dition of the sounds Vive, Viv or Tiv. Signs 26, 28 and 30 in Exercise. The Tiv hook, like the V hook, is not intended to be added to curved letters, but some writers use a large shaded final hook on curves to in- dicate Tiv, as in sign 48. The objection to these shaded final hooks is that generally they have to be written backwards and as it is often hard to form them, it is quite as easy to write the V or Tiv in full. A large final hook, written on the same side of full sized consonants as that on which the N hook is written, represents the addition of the sound Shun, as heard in the words represented by signs 25, 27, 29 and 31 in Exercise. By consulting below diagrams, it will be seen that the Shun hook is an enlarged N hook, the letter N being the last sound in Shun. Similarly, the Tiv hook is an enlarged V hook, the sound of V being: the terminat'ng sound of Tiv. \J/ SK un Tiv or Some phonographers write the Shun and Tiv hooks transposed, but this is very inadvisable, for many reasons. For instance, by writing the Shun hook on the under side of K, the word affectionate (sign 104) is very easily written, but write the Shun hook on the reverse side and the student will find that he can write as far as the sound Shun in the word, but when he attempts to add the final syllable ate, his Shun will be spoiled entirely. This will never happen in writing the syllables Shun or Tiv in the positions prescribed in these lessons. The only syllables which are most likely to follow Tiv are ly or ness, the latter being easily added in either case and the former (/v) being easily added to Tiv only when Tiv is written upon the side prescribed in this lesson. See sign 102 in Exercise. Then again, it is much more reasonable to suppose that Tiv, containing a V sound, should be written on the same side as the V hook, and the syllable Shun, containing an N sound, should be written on the same side as an N hook, an arrangement which is also a great aid to the memory. The circle S or Z is added to both the Shun and Tiv hooks, by enclosing the circle S or Z within the hooks in the manner illustrated by signs 24 and 44 in Exercise. In adding the circle to these large hooks, care should be taken that this addition does not crowd those large hooks into a resemblance to the smaller F or V or N hooks. This is easily avoided by making the large hooks somewhat larger, when adding the circle, than ordinary. The following schedule, which shows how the Shun and Tiv hooks are added to straight letters, gives trfe proper < sizes for the hooks, with or without the circle S. R-shun ^ ^s R - ghuns R-tiv ^ 6\ R-tivs Km- shun xO ^jRnvshunS frm-tiv x^ J Rm-tiv^ R-shun -o 3 K- shuns K-tiv _? _2 R -tivs (Jay -shun l -s Gay- shuns Gay-tiv _> _S Gay- tivs P-shun ^ ^> P- shuns P-tiv NO \s P-tivs B-shun ^ ^ B-sKunS B-tiv V V B-tiv^ T-shun J J T-shun 3 T-tiv L b T-tivs D-shun J J D-ghun.5 P-tiv L b D-tivs Ch-shun J e/ Ch- shuns Ch-tiv 6 ^ Ch-tivs J- shun J c/ J- shuns J-tiv t ^ J- tivs Below we give a table showing how the hooks are added to CUM- letters: F-n V-ZL Th-n ^-^ L-n M-n U ^ C C o/ OS r c* F-nS . TK-ns M-n Ng-a M-ns M^-ns N-ns Kg-n5 F-shun to ^2> I V-shun "D DA G 6 Th-^huns L-shan M-shiin M-shun.3 N-shun. Ng-shun N- shuns r- shunS o In sign 49 of this Exercise, the N hook of the word shown is appar- ently written identically the same as the L hook in the word facial, sign 53 in Lesson V. This resemblance, however, is only a seeming one. The L hook, when added to Ish, should never be mistaken for an N hook, for the following reasons: First, when L and Ish are the only consonants in a word, the L hook is not made use of, Ish being shaded to represent the L in words of one syllable, as in sign 43 in Lesson V, or written full sized in words of two syllables. Second, the Ish in signs 52 and 53, Lesson V, is written upwards, and, therefore, the hook at- tached to it must be a beginning hook, for, were it a final hook, the Ish being written upwards, the hook would be written on the upper end. Third, the hook in signs 52 and 53, Lesson V, being a beginning hook, it could not" be N, for N is a final hook. Fourth, the L hook never being added to Ish, unless some other consonant is contained in the combina- tion, and the R hook being added to Ish only as in sign 42, Lesson V, therefore, the hook in sign 49, this Exercise, must be a final hook, and being a small final hook must be N, for F and V hooks are seldom added to curved letters, and are then shaded, which is not the case with the hook in sign 49, this Exercise. In Lesson IV, promise was made that a rule would be given which would determine the difference between the words fun and funny, and other similar words in which N is the final consonant. The instruction now presented has prepared the student for this explanation, the second paragraph of this lesson directly providing for the distinction. In other words, fun and words terminating with the letter N, ara written with the use of the hook N (sign 34), while words ending with the syllable ny are written with the Visible Alphabet sign for N, the final vowel sound thus, by this distinction in outline, being indicated invisibly, as in sign 65 of Lesson IV. Compare also, in this lesson's Exercise, signs 5 and 8 with n and 12. In sign 23, the concluding vowel sound is written, because China is a proper name. Just as the beginning hook in the word stickler, sign 87 of last lesson, was slighted to make a juncture, so can the final Tiv or Shun hooks be slighted when necessary, as in sign 33 in Exercise to this lesson. The sounds of Sesshun or Sisshun, as heard in the words possession, decision, etc., are nicely represented by continuing the circle S, when added to full sized consonants, into a hook, as in signs 55 and 56. The Ns circle, continued into the same kind of a hook, may similarly rep- resent the sound of Ensisshun, as heard in the word transition, sign 57. An additional circle S is added to these hooks, as in sign 58. The Ns circle may occasionally be continued over to add a final sound of N, as in signs 60 and 61, where the circle and hook read as N-sn, without clashing with the Ensisshun hook. THE ST AND STR LOOPS. A narrow loop, half the length of a full sized consonant and written on the same side of consonant as the circle S or Z is written upon, rep- resents the addition of St or Sd to the main consonant. Signs 62 to 70. A larger loop adds Str. Signs 71, 72, 75, 76, 84, etc. When these loops'are added on the R hook side of P, B, etc., the P or B become doubla consonants, just as though the R hook was actually there, the P or B being pronounced Per, Ber, etc , as the case may be, the St or Str loop being read first, as in signs 83 and 85 (St-per, Str-per) stopper, strapper. A comparison of sign 82 with sign 83 and sign 84 with sign 85 will show their difference of outline and individual significance. See also below diagram: -D T , & i. S" Strt i .^ ^Pn P j^sfe Stp^ ^Stch Strp K $r 5tr 3trr Tr Str Sttr ^-r 3rr 3*rr 3trrr Young students in this art of winged words sometimes are at a loss to understand why phonographers indicate the addition of R to St, by writing St on the R side of P, B, etc., when, as they think, that unneces- sary trouble might be obviated by the use of the Str loop, which contain s R without special assignment of position. The reason this question is very generally asked is because a student does not always immediately grasp the particular u^e of, and difference between those combinations. Let us look carefully at the two signs 83 and 84. Truly the loop of both signs indicate the same consonants. But let us investigate farther. Let us take the entire word of each sign. The first is stopper, the other strop. Now analyze them phonographically, leaving out vowels and repeated consonants, and we find their outlines to be sign 83, st-pr; sign 84, str p. Looking at these analyses, we discover that the R in sign 84 precedes the letter P, while in sign 83 it follows the P. This, then, is the sole secret of their difference in outline. You could not spell stopper by writing an Str loop on the right hand side of letter P, because loops on that side are read before the letter to which they are joined, and you could not spell strop by writing the St loop on the R hook side of P, because in such instance where an R is indicated only in that manner, the R is read after the P. The diagram on opposite page illustrates these differences very clearly: When the St or Str loops terminate a word, the letter N may be indicated in a manner similar to the foregoing indication of the letter R. It is done by writing the St or Str loop, as tli3 case may be, on the N hook side of a letter, thereby clearly indicating N without writing it. Compare signs 86 with 87 and 88 with 89. This is on the same princi- ple as the Ns circle, which sort of terminations are illustrated below: st Str \J C.:tO../^..4^ - 59 r77.^.X- KEY VI. i, roof; 2, remain; 3, cave; 4, gain; 5, puff; 6, bone; 7, tough; 8, down; 9, chaff; 10, June; n, puffy; 12, downy; 13, roofs; 14, remains; 15, caves; 16, gains; 17, puffs; 18, bones; 19, staffs; 20, downs; 21, chiefs; 22, Junes: 23, China; 24, revives; 25, ration; 26, active; 27, caution; 28, po-tive; 29, potion; 30, dative; 31, tuition; 32, stations; 33, stationary; 34, fun; 35, frown; 36, fashion; 37, vine; 38, evasion; 39, loan; 40, -loans; 41, love; 42, man; 43, man's; 44, missions; 45, known; 46, knife; 47, nation; 48, native; 49, si. 50, shines;. 5 1, dances; 52, prances; 53, tenses; 54, bounces; 55, p 56, decision; 57, transition; 58, transitions; 59, translation; 60, Johnson; < i. Wisconsin; 62, post; 63, praised; 64, blest; 65, trust; 66, staid; 67, roast; 68, storm; 69, stick; 70, stag; 71, streak; 72, stream; 73, test; 74, t 75, toaster; 76, stride; 77, fast; 78, list; 79, steel; So, stiff; Si, : 83, stopper; 84, strop; 85, stropper; 86, chaste; 87, chanced; SS, poster; 89, punster; 90, coast; 91, coasters; 92, spinsters; 93, fluster; 94, bo 95, faster; 96, strife; 97, strive; 98, string; 99, strangle; 100, justify; 101, a ive; 102, affectively; 103, affection; 104, affectionate; 105, affectionately; 106, A single lesson well conned surpasses ten merely glanced throi; to h. LESSON VII. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. T and D occur so frequently in words of daily use, and the repre- sentation of those letters, by writing their full phonographic outlines, is often so cumbrous, that a shorter way of expressing their sounds was devised early in the history of phonography. It is done by halving the consonant which immediately precedes T or D, and is termed the Halv- ing Principle. Therefore, all full-sized consonants, whether simple or compound, excepting Ing and Emb or Emp, when halved, express the addition of either T or D. Signs i to 41 in Exercise. Ing nor Emb and Emp, not being halved, when the sound D is re- quired to be added to the light strokes of M and N, those letters should also be made heavy, besides being halved. Signs 9 and 10. When the sound of the letter T is required to be added, the signs should remain slight. Signs 8 and n. Always write the light stroke L-t (sign 6) upwards, and the heavy stroke L-r-d (sign 7) downwards. A halved S is sometimes more conveniently stricken upwards than downwards, as in sign 59. In making use of the half-length consonants, care should be taken that such use does not become an abuse. For instance, while the word miglit may be rightly written as in sign n in Exercise, mighty must be written as in sign 12, because, thougn both words possess the same phonographic consonants (M and T), yet there is a concluding vowel sound in mighty which renders it a necessity, for complete pronuneiation and vocalization, that the extended form be employed. This rule ap- plies to all words terminating with a vowel sound. T or D are added after N or V hooks, by shortening the main con- sonant to which the hook in question occurs, as in signs 14, 27, 31, 32, 43 and 57. This is really equivalent to shortening the entire sign. In signs 42 and 43 the hook V is made in the v most convenient shape. It will not, so made, clash with any other hook. CONSONANTS OF DOUBLE AND TRIPLE SIZE. To express the addition of the sounds ter, der, cher and ther, full sized consonants are made twice their usual length. Signs 69 to 90 in Exercise. This principle is also taken advantage of by experienced phonographers to represent the addition of the words their and there. This doubling principle may also be employed to add the sounds of kcr and gcr to Ing, and the sounds of per and bcr to M. Signs 99 to 103. In applying this doubling principle to the heavy consonants B, D, etc., as in such words as debtor, be careful, throughout the entire length of the double letter, to preserve the heavy stroke, as in sign 70, in order that it may not be taken for the word deity, sign 71. When, in a sentence, any of the syllables ter, der, cher or ther is immediately followed by either of the words their or there, the syllable and word may be sometimes together represented by tripling the pre- ceding consonant, as in signs 91, 93, 95, 97 and 98. This principle of doubling and tripling consonants is, of course, not applicable to any of the small letters of the Visible Alphabet, excepting Way and Whay, it being applied to those last named letters in the manner shown by signs 871091 in Exercise. Consonants, when made double and triple size, indicate the invisible vowel by the first half of their outline, the vowel O of the word bol der being shown by the position of the first half of sign 69, the position of the second half of that outline taking no part in invisible vowel indication. INVISIBLE INDICATION OF PRECEDING VOWELS. In one of the paragraphs of Lesson III, the necessity for economy in word outline is incidently referred to, the word lass being used in illustration. By reference to the paragraph in question, it will be seen that the student is directed to spell lass and kindred words that end in double S, with a single S, thus: 1 a-s, lass. This exercise of economy in the use of the consonants is still more essential in words of more than one syllable, the young phonographer having most need for caution in those words in which the same consonants occur together in the ordinary spelling, as // in illiberal, rr in irregular, etc., etc. Young phonograph- ers are very prone to write illiberal with two commencing phonographic L's, when one commencing L is sufficient illiberal, irregular, immoral and kindred words being divided into phonographic sound syllables, thus: short-i and li-brel for illiberal; short-i and re-glar for irregular; short-i and mrl for immoral. In other words,there are exactly the same consonant sounds in immoral and such words as there are in moral, etc. that is, m-r-1 the only difference being the commencing short-i; there- fore moral and immoral should have the same consonant outline in short- hand, illiberal the same consonant outline as liberal, etc., etc.; the dis- tinction between them being made by placing thj word commencing with the short-i above the line of writing, as in signs 105, 107 and 109 in Exercise, the words moral, regular and liberal being placed on the line of writing, independent of their vowel sounds, they being words not needing invisible vowel indication, but needing to be \\\ easiest position. This brings us to the subject introduced by the heading to this por- tion of the lesson the Invisible Indication of Preceding Vowels the preceding vowel, in the case of such words as immoral, irregular, etc., being indicated by placing the outline in the first position, above the line. This is for one class of words having a commencing vowel. An- other class, whose commencing vowel is followed by the sound of S, we indicate that commencing vowel by writing the long S, as in sign 22, in Lesson III. If the commencing vowel should be immediately followed by the sound of L, we can indicate that preceding vowel by writing L downwards, as in signs 112, 114, 115, in this Exercise, as could also be done in the case of sign 107, if the student prefers, though in sign 107 it is not necessary, for the rule for // applies there. The writing of L downwards to indicate a vowel preceding it, applies also to syllables which are not the first syllables of a word. For instance, the syllable el of fuel, contains a vowel preceding the letter L of el, and therefore the L.in that outline is written downwards. Sign 111 in this Exercise. Wherever a vowel follows L, write L upwards, as in signs no and 113. A vowel preceding S is indicated, as explained in Lesson III, by writing the S of the Invisible Alphabet, as in the word ask, sign 22 in Lesson III, above refered to, and as in signs 66 and 67 of this lesson. Occasionally, a commencing vowel may be indicated by what i? known as the fourth position i, e., writing the first consonant of the word in question just under and touching the line of writing, as in signs 119 and 1 20. This position represents any commencing vowel, it being used only when the character of the vowel itself is not important, the writer merely needing to know that there is a preceding vowel to be able to read the outline. It is best not to use this plan excepting where the word has also a conspicuous third-place vowel elsewhere in its sound. The author does not particularly commend this fourth position plan; and, in fact, rather than hesitate between rules, the author would remind students that they can always use visible vowels to words commencing with a vowel, when they so desire, and it is often quite as convenient, as in signs 116, 117 and 118, though there are many occasions where the consonant outline alone is so plain that a Deginning vowel does not need indication, as in such words as admission and attention, signs 121 and 122. This matter of indicating an invisible beginning vowel is, after all, one which students of all methods of phonography must regulate for themselves. Some will find nearly all outlines perfectly legible without indicating invisible preceding vowels, while others who do not possess quite as good a memory of sight may need to make such indications frequently. Above rules, however, apply to all cases. EXERCISE VII. KEY VII. i, Date; 2, write; 3, rate; .;, vote; 5, that; 6, iate; 7, Lord; S, night; 9, need; TO, mud; n, might; 12, mighty; 13, bright; 14, bind; 15, cheered: 16, child; 17, cloud; 1 8, court; 19, told; 20, dread; 21, ward; 22, hurt; 23, yield; 24, wont; 25, flight; 26, fright; 27, found; 28, find; 29, notes; 30, mates; 31, braved; 32, grooved; 33, sort; 34, sound; 35, sprite; 36, sacred; 37, strained; 38, surround; 39, sent; 40, send; 41, slight; 42, receive; 43. received; 44, better; 45, mattress; 46, pullet; 47, midnight; 48, sentiment; 49, named; 50, maiden; 51, clothed; 52, rock; 53, rocked; 54, rib; 55, rib- bed; 56, love; 57, loved; 58, knowest; 59, nicest; 60, fitted; 61, portrait; 62, titled; 63, derived; 64, deserved; 65, engraved; 66, assort; 67, assort- ment; 68, captivate; 69, bolder; 70, debtor; 71, cliety; 72, chatter; 73, char- ter; 74, order; 75, culture; 76, fitter; 77, father; 78, farther; 79, falter; 86. verdure; 81, thither; 82, zither; 83, meter; 84, mother; 85, furniture; 86. wilderness; 87, sweeter; 88, water; 89, weather; 90. whether; 91, whether their; 92, enter; 93, enter their house; 94, center; 95, center their ideas: 96, further; 97, further their laws; 98, surrender their homes; 99, juniper: 100, hamper; 101, lumber; 102, tinker; 103, finger; 104, moral; 105. immoral; 106, liberal; 107, illiberal; 108, regular; 109, irregular; no. sickly; in, fuel; 112, alum; 113, likely; 1 14, elective; 1 15, elocutionist; 116, else; 117, item; 118, Edmund; 119, answer; 120, another; 121, ad- mi-sion; 122, attention; 123, ablution; 124, intimation; 125, intention; 126, indicates; 127, indication; 128, indicated; 129, undivided; 130, injunction; 131, Neither brave nor just men employ slander. . LESSON VIII. There are a small number of brief words in our language, mostly one-syllabled, whose frequent occurrence and consequent rapid utter- ance precludes the possibility of writing them, even phonetically, as fast as they can be spoken. To provide for such emergencies, all methods of shorthand writing employ brief arbitrary characters called Word- Signs, some phonographies containing long lists of them. But, becau-2 of a better construction of principles, Haven's Practical Phonography requires only fifteen such arbitrary characters, all of which are contained in the following list: THE WOTVD-SIGNS. ...; Of % . All To ....%.... Two Too s .' Or Already But j Before .J The ....!.. On ..'.'... Ought ..., Who Whom An * The above list of word-signs, being entirely arbitrary, students must not expect to find in them any element of previously explained principles that is, they must neither expect them to agree in position with their vowel sounds nor their outline to be composed of any portion of the consonants of the words they represent, the instances in which previously explained principles will be recognized being very few. Commit the list of word-signs thoroughly to memory in the manner described for memorizing the Visible Alphabet and repeatedly test your ability to write the proper signs without referring to the list. In the list of word-signs, the signs are placed beneath, on or over dotted lines. These dotted lines must not be mistaken to be a part of any of the signs. The dotted lines are supposed to be the lines of the paper on which one is writing, and are merely placed there, as in the Exercises of these les- sons, to show that the same word-sign, in order to represent different words, is sometimes written on, above or under the line, as in the case of the indication of invisible vowels. Thus, students find that, in phonography, words are sometimes denoted by position in the same manner that a vowel sound of a word is generally indicated by the position of a consonant. No difficulty need be apprehended in regard to deciphering such signs when met with in regular sentences. They will never be mis- taken for halved characters, nor for any of the small letters of the Visible Alphabet, which they may seem to resemble, as their uses are entirely different. They are not in same positions when written alone, and when used in sentences words preceding or following them are always perfect keys to them. It is well, however, to explain cLarly their particular uses. IntheJjstof word-signs there is one representing the article the. It is the fifth one of the light outlines presented in the list. Particular attention is called to that sign because it looks like the letter Hay, and because, for that reason, it must always be written in a particular direc- tion, that is, upwards, from left to right. As the outline stands alone in. the list, the student may suppose that it does not matter in which direc- tion it is written, and if it were always written alone in actual use it would not matter; but even if it be but occasionally joined and then joined upwards, as is the case, it would be better to write the sign up- wards even when written alone, in order to form the habit, for very rapid writing is greatly a matter of habit. And, as it is particularly neces- sary, both for the purpose of speed and for legibility, that this sign for the be written always joined when possible, it will be understood how important it is at the outset to form the habit of writing the sign for the upward. The main object, in fact, of all the fifteen word-signs in Haven's Practical Phonography, is to facilitate junctures with each other, forming a principle of phrasing viz, writing two or more words connectedly with- out lifting the pen a principle which means a great deal in point of spejd ia writing shorthand and can be made an efficient aid to reading one's notes if the simple directions in regard to junctures are carefully observed. Commencing with sign i in Exercise, some three lines of said Exercise will be seen to be devoted to illustrations of how these fifteen word-signs are joined into beautiful little phrases, which, by their brevity, give much speed, and, because of the fact that they look nothing Kke anything but what they mean, are also an important aid to legibility. Ly looking carefully at these first three lines of our Exercise, it will be noticed that the word-signs are joined to other characters. For in- stance, in sign i, the word-sign for of has the letter a joined to it, the j incture forming the phrase of a. In sign 4 the word he is joined to the word-sign for all, the word he being expressed by the letter Hay, the combination making the phrase all he. In sign 6 and 'is joined to a/!, the word and being expressed by the & or Ai of our Visible Alphabet, the phrase thus formed representing all and. In sign 12, the personal pronoun I is joined to the word-sign for or, making the phrase or I. Thus, by these four instances just noted, we have introduced the four words, /, lie, a and and into the phrases, these four words not being needed in any list because a, I and and were given in the Alphabet in Lesson II, and the word he is, of course, naturally spelled with the letter Hay of the alphabet. In the same manner as the word he is spelled, we we can also spell the words we and you, the word -we being spelled with the letter Way, and you by either of the signs for U or short-u of the Visible Alphabet, according to whichever of those two signs of U joins easiest. This gives us six words which we can join to these word- signs, and a peculiarity of all six is that they are attachable in any position, those six words when joined taking the position occupied by the other words to which they are joined. This is also the case with the word-sign for an and the word-sign for /// ..\...Us,use^ieaning of use)..?.Is.his ..V...Use ^pronounced u2e}...o..As.has, the ciphei ...^.Form \ Ever ...7^ Have, five ..."^..However ..."!>.. Value ....>.. Think ....(...Them .../.... Though, thank r t ^ ...Either, author ..( Other ...7^..Wish ..-J..ShalliU3uaI-ly .._/.. issue ...^7...Will ..O..Am ..XTHN.. Him, make Home Was o Is it ..., be or bevn, /'/, do, winch, for, from, have, tJtem, shall, will and you, and even these only where shown in the Exercises. The circle S or Z can be added to any of the abbreviations of the foregoing list, in the manner indicated in signs 2, 4 and 6 in Exercise. There is only one point in which the above word-abbreviations do not agree with previously described principles /'. e., in their place positions. They are not all placed in position in accordance with their visible vowel elements. This is because some of them take their positions \~\ accord- ance with the importance of the words they represent, those words which are apt to occur most frequently being placed on the line simply because it is the easiest position in which to write, and hence enables the phonographer to write them much more quickly than would be possible were they placed in the position which their vowel sounds would have placed them. Words so placed out of position are, however, only those which the student will find no difficulty in recognizing in their new po- sitions, after once memorizing them, as with the word-signs. Where an abbreviation in the foregoing, or any list of word-abbreviations, has laced opposite it two or more words, each word separated by a comma (as with the first and third abbreviations in the foregoing list), the abbreviation in question may separately represent eith' r word, but only one of the words at a time. Where two or more words, placed opposite a phonographic abbreviation, are not separated by a comma (as with the fourth abbreviation in the foregoing list), the abbreviation in ques- tion represents all words opposite it at one and the same time. Finally, when, opposite a phonographic abbreviation, three or more words ap- pear, the words being separated by commas in some instances and not in others (as with the abbreviation for first, near the end of preceding list), then the abbreviation is intended to represent, at one ar.d the same time, any group of words not so separated, but not more at a time. There are occasions when the words is, his and similar words repre- sented by the circle S, may be indicated by enlarging the S circle of a preceding word, as in signs 57 and 101 in Exercise. Similarly the circle S, which, in this word-abbreviation list, represents either is or his, would represent both words if made into a large .SVc-circle, as in sign 69. As //as and was as would be formed on the same plan, as per signs 71 and 73. As the letter T is used as a word-abbreviation for take in the fore- going list, it is therefore allowable to represent taken by the addition of the hook N to the letter T, as in signs 39 and 40 in Exercise. This brings us to a very important principle in rapid writing, respecting the extension of the use of the word-abbreviations. Incur list is presented only the root word, it being expected that the student will, from those word- abbreviations as a base, build other abbreviations by simply adding the different terminations which distinguish the same family of words. Fcr instance, just as the letter Chay in sign 8 represents the word charge, so it is allowable and expected that the word charges (sign 9) be formed by adding a circle to the sign for charge, and the syllable dis be added to the sign for charge when the word discharge is desired to be written, as in sign 10. On the same principle the words larger and largest are built from If-rge, signs n, 12 and 13; hourly is built from our, signs 23 and 25; objects, objector, objection and objective from object, signs 34 to 38, inclusive; and hundreds of other word-abbreviations arrived at in a manner which gives the student the key note to the thousands of word signs which other authors put in their dictionaries in a way which requires years to memorize them, but which, on this plan, without any dictionary, enables the student to write them on sight as soon as he or she becomes familiar with our lessons. Authority, sign 109, is thus formed from author, etc. Signs 58 and 59, in Exercise, show how the word-abbreviations help to distinguish between letters that are attached to them, those two out- lines, although one begins with a letter of the alphabet, the letter I, and the other commences with the word sign for of, forming characters nearly alike, are rendered perfectly distinct by the fact that the word- abbreviations give them different positions, these word-abbreviations equally well distinguishing between halved characters and word-signs, even when there are no other means of distinction which there generally are halved outlines never clashing with a vowel character or a word- sign, as they are used for different purposes. The word whereas, as will be seen by sign 63, is formed by the junct- ure of the word-abbreviations for inhere and as. In the next compound word, shown by sign 64, elsewhere, ll.e word where is out of position, but, being joined, is perfectly legible ia that case. This leads us to state that the words else and less will sometimes clash unless the E of else is written, or some other means of indicating that beginning vowel is taken advantage of for instance, in junctures where the vowel cannot be writ- ten, write less upward and else downward. This can only be shown in junctures. When else is written alone, else must have its vowel written. la signs 77 to 80 inclusive, the circle-S is added within loops to indicate the addition of is, as or was. The word seldom, on third line from the end of Exercise, is abbrevi- ated by omitting the M. It is perfectly legible thus curtailed. To signs 87 to 98 inclusive, the student should give special atten- tion. In Lesson III, describing the use of the circle-S, which, in this lesson, represents is, his, as, has. or was, according to position, the stu- dent was instructed to always write such circle on the right-hand side of upright or slanting straight characters, and on the upper side of horizontal ones. In that same lesson the student was enjoined, when the circle-S was added to R or Arm, to consider those letters the same as the hori- zontal cues K and Gay, because they are written in the same direction from lefi to right the circle being thus attachable upon the upper sides of R or Arm, precisely as to K and Gay. This same rule will apply to the word-sign for the when the circle is joined to it, because the stroke the is written upwards from left to right, the same as K and R, and therefore takes all circles added to it on the upper side of the stroke, as in signs 87 to 89 and 96 to 98 inclusive. On the other hand, the stroke he, being written downwards, the circle S is attachable to it on the same side as to the letter Chay, the circle being, therefore, according to rule before quoted, attachable on to the right-hand side of Chay or the stroke he, whether such circles begin, as in signs 90 to 92, or terminate he. as in signs 93 to 95. This arrangement writing the stroke always downward for he and upward for tiie, and placing the circles on the upper left-hand side of tlie and right-hand side of he, will serve as a sure means of distinction between such outlines, both in reading and writing. The circle-S, representing is, as or was, may be written double length to add the word there or their, as in signs 74 to 70. These forms will not clash with is it, as it and was it, in word-abbreviation list, for those word-abbreviations are slanted, whereas signs 74 to 76 are horizontal. EXERCISE IX. ta.lf^.4.^.aLtfl-?l..iy..^ /&^2!S**<^x<^x. v The word shall, in sign in, will be noticed to have been written up- wards. This is allowable where junctures are to be facilitated with letters or words, but when Ish has only hooks attached, and no other character added, Ish must be written downwards, as in sign 42 of Lesson V, and sign 49 of Lesson VI, to show on which end the circle or hook is to be read. KEY IX. i, It; 2, its; 3, come; 4, comes; 5, do; 6, does; 7, and do you; 8, charge; 9, charges; 10, discharge; n, large; 12, larger; 13, largest; 14, ad- vantage; 15, advantages; 16, advantageous; 17, disadvantage; 18, Jesus; 19, Jesus Christ; 20, yours; 21, are; 22, are there; 23, our; 24, ours; 25, hourly; 26, give; 27, gives; 28, give them; 29, common; 30, commonly; 31, commonest; 32, to be sure; 33, is to be; 34, object; 35, objects; 36, object- or; 37, objection; 38, objective; 39, taken; 40, taken up; 41, to-day; 42, to-day's; 43, Yours of to-day's mail received; 44, out; 45, outward; 46, out- side; 47, outwit; 48, off; 49, often; 50, office; 51, facts; 52, wish; 53. wisher; 54, wish their; 55, think; 56, thinks; 57, and thinks his a; 58, I think; 59, of them; 60, improve; 61, improves; 62, where; 63, whereas; 64, elsewhere; 65, year; 66, years; 67, yearly; 68, is; 69, is his; 70, as; 71, as has; 72, was; 73, was as; 74, is there; 75, as there; 76, was there; 77, as there has; 78, is it as; 79, as it has; 80, was it as; 8r, and is; 82, and as; 83, and was; 84, is an; 85, as an; 86, was an; 87, is the; 88, as the; 89, was the; 90, is he; 91, as he; 92, was he; 93, he is; 94, he has; 95, he was; 96, his is the; 97, as has the; 98, was as the; 99, is not; 100, is sent; 101, is seen; 102, is that; 103, that is; 104, has been; 105, as has been; 106, why there have; 107, whether there have;jio8, His time is limited; 109, Has it your full authority? no, The patent is my invention; in, At what hour shall I be on board ? 112, That issue as. given forth came out Tuesday last; 113, A select party of us will make the trip up-country; 114, Where is it the charges are to be found? 115, I am far from liking the form of his order; 116, Which offer was it the author first made you? 117, The value the thing brought was small one dollar in a thousand; 118, If our plan ever matures as it should, we will owe many thanks to the little kingdom; '119, How long were you there with young Brown ? One year. Can he appreciate the impor- tance of a use of that language? Yes, I think he does. Does he use it often? Yes, sir. Yet the others say they never heard him? They were seldom with him; we were usually together daily. He improved each day beyond my calculations. Any change, however hard, took but little time for him to master. To-day he will read -four chapters, though to do from one to five an hour would take but little effort when he either wished to or has had much rest at home. I hope for still more important improvement. LESSON X. A list of word-abbreviations containing either beginning or final hooks is presented in table on opposite page. Learn them as directed for the Word-Signs of Lesson VIII, and the Common Abbreviations of last lesson. They will bs found upon better acquaintance to be ex- ceedingly handy, not only containing important speed elements, but being also thoroughly legible when well memorized. Si^ns 113 to 141 in Exercise, illustrate the adaptability of the abbreviations in this list being extended by adding terminating differ- ences, the word remembrance, sign 114, being simply remember, sign 113, with an Ns circle added; equalled, sign 1 18, being formed by halving the word equal, sign 117; over their, sign 131, being a lengthened over, sign 130; and a number of words, as in signs 137 to 141, being formed from the word-abbreviation for organ, illustrating clearly the apparent inex- haustibility of word-abbreviation formation, aside from the instances given in the lesson. In memorizing word-abbreviation lists> the student should bear in mind, as explained in connection with the Common Abbreviations in Lesson IX, that it must not be expected of word-abbreviations that they should in every case agree in position with their vowel sounds. Sometimes the greater conspicuousness of a vowel in one word-abbrev- iation will compel another word-abbreviation with less conspicuous vowel sound, to occupy a position which, reasoning by place position rule, would properly not belong to it. The word-abbreviations in the foregoing list of Half-Length Abbreviations is evidence of this. Furthermore, it is not always the case that conflictions with another word-abbreviation causes it to be written in a position out of accordance with its vowel elements. Sometimes a word-abbreviation is given an apparently wrong position because the outline cf some ordinary word, not a word-abbreviation, would conflict with it. Again, words with first or third-place vowels are sometimes represented by signs written in the second position, on the line, simply because that is the easiest position in which to write; though this is done only in cases wherein the word- abbreviations would be perfectly familiar in any position and at the same time would not clash with common or other words of similar outline. A student's practice in the art of rapid, and, at the same time, leg- ible writing, depends very greatly upon the frequency and length cf time given to practising the art. Students who practice most frequently and for the longest period at a time master the art first. HOOKED ABBREVIATIONS- .../..People, appeal ...^..Apply ..A.Principle-al-ly \ ......Appear ...;.. Be long ...\ Able, belief .believe \ ....^.Liberty ...\Re-member .5Y. Brother, number .. [...Till, tell ...(!.. .Until ....'..Truth LjDeliver 1 ...'..Doctor .!.. Dear ./.Angel . X.. Danger Call,equal-ly c Difficult-y ^- AV7f Ul ....J... Addition .1 ..Providential ..Over ..rXi Very, every ..^..Moreover > Witha-l i ^..Jehovah /..Juvenile ...^..Religion ...J)... Pleasure , sure ...JJ.. Measure , assure .C... Well Mr . ,remark-ed-abl ........Then .../....Than - ../^T.. Alone, eleven, learn q ,J...Internal-ly "3 Eternal-ity ^ Divine, defendant ...(..... Revelation <^_ Glory-ify-fied Agree, degree .^.Work ^..Workmen t/ /?.. Workman ...L...Differ-ent-ence 1 ...Advance J Denominate .../?. Revolution ....Human Opinion J Done J Condition Union . ..^T^. Inf ormat i on WORDS INDICATED BY HOOKS. As Emb i.s frequently employed in professional work to represent the words may be, sign 2 in Exercise, Way-Emb may be quite as readily employed for the phrase we may be, sign 3 in Exercise. This is on the principle that, as the letter Way represents we, the letter M, may, and B the verb be: therefore, Way-Emb, which really contains the consonant elements of all three words, can quite consistently be written for them altogether. Reasoning from this point of view, as Ith on the line spells they and the letter R will do for are, the combination Thr will answer for the phrase they are, as in sign i in Exercise. Upon the same plan, as the word will is represented as a word-abbreviation by the letter L, we may occasionally use the hook L for the word will or even all, as in signs 6 to 17 in Exercise, and the N hook for the words own, been, than or one, as in signs 18 to 26 in Exercise. As sign 26 represents at one, sign 27 would, of course, by making the N hook into a circle, represent the words at once. To the word-signs or, but, etc., and to any halved characters, such as did, the N hook can be used for the word not, as in signs 40, 41 and 42. To full sized characters, however, such as do, had, be, haf>e, etc., the word not must be spelled by writing an N hook and halving the words do, had, etc., to add the T of not, as in signs 44 to 53 inclusive. ll'c will not, sign 49, is a case in point. In that outline, analyzed, we find the beginning hook-Way represents we, the letter L, will, and the final N hook, together with the shortening of the entire combination to add T, indicates not. Result: We will not. May not, sign 53, and other similar abbreviations, are sub- ject to the same manner of analysis, the letter T being quite correctly added after a final hook by shortening the main consonant to which the hook is attached. Signs 57 and 58 illustrate instances where not must be written with a halved N to distinguish might and meant, to which not is there attached. Continuing the above plan, the words are and our may be represented by the hook R (signs 29 to 34 and 36 to 39) and off, forth, of, //or have by the V hook (signs 59 to 76). Signs 35 and 36 show howjiw/r and our are distinguished in such combinations. The circle-S may be quite legibly employed to represent the pronoun wf, when joined to some words. Signs 79 to 81 in Exercise. In many words possessing the same consonants, a difference of outline is taken ^dv x antage of, in order to aid legibility. The words last, lost and lowest possess the same consonant sounds (L-S-T) and have some position vowels, but should be distinguished by indicating the consonants in the three different ways shown by signs 90 to 92 in Exercise, the most frequently occurring word being given the shortest and easiest made outline. Other instances of distinction are illustrated in signs 95 to 102. Without regard to size, when there is a choice, make use of such outlines for word representation, as are easiest made and afterwards interpreted. Thus, though both the outlines of sign 103 are proper ones for the word murder, yet the largest sign is best, because the crook in the shorter sign, caused by the juncture of R, necessitates the ex- penditure of more time than is requi.ed for making an uninterrupted outline such as the large outline for murder presents. As illustrated in Lesson IV, by the word customary (sign 67 in Ex- ercise to that lesson) many words are perfectly familiar by their con- sonant outline alone, and hence are written in the second position, that position being the easiest in which to write. Some of the word-ab- breviations are of that character, and so are the outlines for the words saith and said (pronounced seth and sed~) and also survey and circle, signs 105 to 109 in this lesson. In sign 5 in Exercise, the word certain is written cert, the letter N being omitted. This is one of a number of easily remembered contrac- tions which the student will meet with in these concluding lessons and \vhich are to be accepted unconditionally as being the best forms for those words. Many of such contractions are really word-abbreviations, which it was thought best, for the purpose of memorizing, to give the pupils in their Exercises rather than arranged in the list-forms. The words in the sentences of this Exercise are also words of this character. In fact, there is no precise limit at which one need stop in thip matter of abbreviations* providing the student keeps within the bounds of legibility, the latter being a matter upon which every phonographer must bring individual judgment to bear those whose memory is more retentive than their fingers are agile, being able to abbreviate with more safety than persons whose 'quickness of hand exceeds their capacity for mem- orizing the latter class not needing as much abbreviation as the former. But do not permit the thirst for abbreviations to interfere with the rep- resentation of SOUND SYLLABLES, in words of not very frequent occurrence. A proper appreciation of the sound syllables of language is a great aid to students in building cut- lines for infrequently occurring words, and it is, therefore, an aid that should be cultivated as much as possible. A good way to attain this result is to write words in as few syllables as possible, consistent with legibility. For instance, do not divide the word vagrancy thus: va-ga- ran-see, sign 1 12; nor yet omit the final vowel sound as in va-grans, sign in. The shape of sign 112 forms too extended an outline for speed and that of sign 1 1 1 is too brief for legibility, while, by the use of the Ns circle as a termination, sign 1 1 1 fails to provide for the final invisible vowel, which is always entitled to representation by writing the last consonant in full. Vagrancy should be divided into sound syllables as in sign 110 va-gran-cy thus giving its final vowel full representation by the use of the full-sized letter S, and at the same time rendering the word outline sufficiently brief for rapid writing. NS VERSUS S. The small circle S, when occurring in such junctures as task (sign 83 in Exercise) is frequently misunderstood, until its formation is properly explained, to be an Ns circle. While its shape is exactly that of the Ns circle, yet its right to be written in the same manner, is very conclusive. This can be best illustrated by closely observing the com- binations of the consonant sounds of t-k, t-s-k, t-n-s-k, as they are shown in the words talk, task and transaction in signs 82, 83 and 84 of Exercise. The letter T of sign 82, it will be observed, is written directly on and touching the dotted line. To add Ns to that letter one must necessarily first turn the end of the T, which rests on the line, into an N hook and then bring it round into a circle, after which, if we want to add K, the K will appear somewhat above the line on which the T rests, as in sign 84 When, however, only S-K is to be added to T, the S is written under the dotted line, at the lower end of the T, thus bringing the final letter K on the line (sign 83) as perfectly as T-K is written without the S in sign 82. This arrangement clearly isolates the circle S (sign' 83) from any col- lusion with the letters T or K, excepting as a joined letter, and clearly indicates that it is not written on the left-hand side of T, as might be supposed, but rather on the under side, which as perfectly declares its individuality as though it were written upon the right-hand side, an arrangement which, in this sort of a combination, would be quite awk- ward; and, as this similarity between the S and Ns circles will never, under any circumstances, cause them to be mistaken, the one for the other, is a needless one. Convenience in writing is as necessary to rapid writing as brevity is, and clearly formed angles are as necessary to speed. The manner in which the circle S in sign 83 is added, is the most convenient way it can be added, prevents the K from degenerating into the shape of an N, as it would if the circle were written on the right hand side of T, and therefore preserves the shape of all the letters in the combination, and the circle S in such outlines never clashes with the Ns circle. Always place the circle on the proper side, when possible, but sometimes, as in instances above noted and in signs 5 and 85 to 88, the S circle has to be joined in the most convenient way for the reasons first given. The juncture of the word has, in signs 77 and 78 of Exercise, in which case it is apparently turned upon the left side of the word //, is also in accordance with the placing of the circle S in the word task. RESPECTING PRACTICE. A plaaof practice in writing which will much accelerate the student's proficiency, is that of practicing in precisely the same manner a regular phonographic reporter works. To accomplish this object, procure a reporter's note book, either by purchase or making it yourself. These books are about the size and shape of a common pass-book, and nearly half an inch thick, to admit of lengthy reports being taken; but, unlike most other note books, they open at the bottom instead of at the side, and when in use, only one side of the paper is written on that which is nearest and, afterwards, when those pages are all written upon, the book is turned and the other sides are ready for use. This method ahvays secures a good foundation for the phonographic writing, and pre- 'vents in a great measure awkward illegibility. Some teachers claim that a good plan of study for the purpose of gaining familiarity with a large number of words, is for the student to get a common spelling-book and practice on all the hard words therein. Practice of this sort, it is claimed by such teachers, will go a great way toward making easy the path which leads to rapid writing. This is in a measure true, though only of the student who has thoroughly memor- ized all the Exercises of the lessons for others it will simply delay pro- gress. In fact, any attempt of the student, until he has finished the lessons, to write words not in the lessons as far as he has learned, is to be deprecated, for the reason* that, until all the principles of the art have been learned, he is sure to make imperfect outlines for words containing principles at v:hich he has not arrived, and his eyes are unfortunately too apt to make mental pictures of such wrong outlines, and when he comes to practice for speed, after the lessons are finfehed, he will find difficulty in avoiding those bad outlines. Every lesson should be well learned be- fore the student makes any attempt at writing words not in the lessons he has learned. Then, when all are learned, he will, by having in mind all the principles, be enabled to more readily form words not in the lessons. EXERCISE X. ..44..A.^3...4*ji.4^^.46?47^.4y! / ^. < f^ j J i> yj-.^A^.^yd w y7X.^*.y9 | -.^ r ft.W...^.L- - ^ J p ..9o^.9L^\..9Z.^..9d....^ \rr^.M^rmM ^ZO.J..^Zl. m ^.^ZZ.^^.^3 f -J- I i -..^./z. /j..^.^.^6:..\.^..\^.^.^ .?...ui " > ^ i --- -^ ^ -,-^.-.// ^ KEY X. i, they are; 2, may be; 3, we may be; 4, they may be likely; 5, you may be certain; 6, it will; 7, which will; 8, much will; 9, at all; 10, for all; n, of all; 12, to all; 13, on all; 14, and all the; 15, and will you; 16, who will; 17, in all; 18, my own; 19, our own; 20, have been; 21, more than; 22, softer than; 23, no one; 24, none; 25, some one; 26, at one; 27, at once; 28, and are own; 29, on our; 30, but our; 31, of ours; 32, of our own; 33, to ours; 34, to our own; 35, by your; 36, by our; 37, who are; 38, each are; 39, which are; 40, or not; 41, but not; 42, did; 43, I did not; 44, Ida not; 45, I had not; 46, be not; 47, have not; 48, I will not; 49, we will not; 50, we are not; 51, I think not; 52, am not; 53, may not; 54, wn mean; 55, we meant; 56, we may not; 57, we meant not; 58, we might not; 59, cle_ar off; 60, set off; 61, set forth; 62, call forth; 63, we are of; 64, which are of; 65, out of; 66} or if; 67, but if; 68, and of; 39, v/hich have; 70, all have; 71, who have; 72, I have; 73, to have; 74, Iha~^ been; 75, I have to be; 76, to have been; 77, it has been; 78, such has been taken; 79, let us; So, sent us; 81, send us; 82, talk; 83, task; 84, transaction; 85, desire; 86, dissection; 87, destroy; 88, desolate; 89, dissolute; 90, last; 91, lost; 92, lowest; 93, wheat; 94, white; 95, stock; 96, stack; 97, marked; 98, market; 99, greatly; 100, gradually; 101, read; 102, re(a)d; 103, murder; 104, days; 105, saith; 106, said; 107, survey; 1 08, circle; 109, circular; no, vagrancy; 1 1 1, va-grans; 112, va-ga-ran-cy; 113, member; 114, remembrance; 115, brother; 116, brethren; 117, equal; 118, equaled; 119, imaginary; 120, imagination; 121, govern; 122, governor; 123, again; 124, against; 125, angel; 126, angelic; 127, Dear Doctor; 128, measured; 129,' measure their; 130, over; 131, over their; 132, overthrow; 133, overcome; 134, every; 135, everyone; 136, everything; 137, organs; 138, organize; 139, organic; 140, organism; 141, organization; 142, Tell the difference; 143, The truth of a question; 144, Liberty is the best government; 145, Till you agree to call; 146, The organ, then, belongs to Mr. White; 147, To the Christian, eternity means union; 148, Delivered from an awful internal danger; 149, Many people appear to be more able than lucky; 150, Mercy .and Truth are attributes of Jehovah; 151, The very measure I began to fear is on appeal; 152, Learn to humor the aged, but kindly govern the child; 153, Denominate alone a degree of juvenile philanthropy; 154, A providential revelation was the defendant's testimony; 155, Poverty often applies the lash which leads to ultimate honor; 156, We base our opinions upon information often second-handed and withal faulty; 157, Above all things remember that principles need not be prejudices; 158, Until you assure me to whom they belong, you shall retain them; 159, Punishment is the pleasure of the cruel, the manner of a darkened mind; 1 60, Phonography has had its revolution here and most of its difficulties have vanished; 161, This generation can only imagine the remarkable glory which awaits the human race of the future; 162, True religion is from within, and is that divine belief which sees a brother or sister in every human countenance; 163, Generally the work which is well begun is nearly done; moreover, it is equally sure that the conditions will be less wearisome; 164, Your next lesson is number eleven. When through with it and the twelfth, begin all the lessons again and review each one thoroughly until your advance in the art has brought speed and ease in reading. LESSON XL COMPOUND ABBREVIATION. ..../... Speak, speech J... Audience .. ./ Especially .1... Providence ^ ....Secession .A .Spiritual-ly L- "TV. .Dignity ...^ Cessation \> Person ../^....Justification ...^....Association ...\... Yesterday .,{T... Salvation ../^...Manufacture Minimum Peculiar ...(^...Jurisdiction ...<\.. Jerusalem ..(^...Juxtaposition ..^.... Archangel ..x\-\. Represent \ ........Business ...\.. Subject ........Strength ^^v^^ Memoranda Memorandum 1 External-ly /"\_. Reform ....^....Construct . ..P.. .Satisfy ..xr^\...Respect-ful-ly Because <^v_o Maximum Impossible P .System Scripture, describ e Somebody Stenography 1 Extreme-ity Inscribe-i J . Strange Signify, signature Influence ....!f...Instruct-ed ....[...Utilize l b ..> P.. No sir Nscessary . d ..Universe-al-itj -....C...This ...Q.. Those ..s^P..unite<3 states / . Knowledge ,..c... Advert is e-ments The above list of compound abbreviations is of equal importance with those which have preceded it, should be as thoroughly memorized, and is as adaptable to the formation of derivative abbreviations as the other lists, illustrations of which are given in signs 153 t:> 255, subjection, sign 154, being formed by adding a Shun hook to subject, sign 153; sub- jective, sign 155, by the addition of a Tiv hook, etc., etc., etc., through- out the lesson. The beginning hook preceding the circle-S in the word-abbreviations fur instruct and inscribe in foregoing list, is used to express the sound of in, en or un before the S-circle only where the long N will not readily join. If students will note carefully how the particular sort of word- abbreviations in this list are often made up of short-cuts of speech, such as Ins or biz for Inisiness (the seventh abbreviation in the list), ad for advertisement, dig for dignity, sig for signify, etc., they will be able to make many similar short-cuts for themselves, in words which would be other- wise cumbrous, and will understand why such outlines as/j/, sign 162 in Exercise, does for Pennsylvania; bach, sign 170, for bachelor; cab, sign 171, for capable; kath for Catholic, sign 172; pop, sign 188, for popular; pub, sign 189, {QT public or publish, and the reasons for many other simi- lar abbreviations in this lesson. Then of course, if pub does lot publish, add an R to it and we have publisher, as in sign 190; add a Shun to pub, as in sign 191, and we have publication; begin pub with an R and we have repub, as in sign 193, meaning republic; put an N hook to that and we get republican, sign 192, etc., etc. On the same plan, kath being Catholic, put an R in front of it and we 'have R-kath, which will naturally be read for Roman-Catholic, as in sign 173. This use of the letter R for a whole word as in Roman in this instance, we may extend to other words or collection of words, representing each word of that collection by one letter, as p-r-r for Pennsylvania Railroad, sign 163 in Exercise; 1-j-k for Li-rd Jesus Christ, sign 167, etc., etc. All these methods of abbreviation are done in words and phrases, names, etc., which are familiar to the writer, and whereof he needs only a suggestion in order to read them. With words or phrases which are not familiar, this shortening should not be attempted, but all that are given in these lessons can and should be used, familiar or not, as they are necessary to speed. The student should, therefore, practice them until they become familiar, and employ these principles of abbreviation on all possible occasions not illustrated in the lessons where similar words and phrases are familiar. Practice in suck invention will soon make it easy and as spontaneous in actual rapid work on words never attempted before, as if it was being done at ease, giving the writer possibilities which no dictionary or phrase-book can give, so long as it is borne in mind to write all words and phrases in these lessons exactly as the author gives them. In such words as are represented by signs 24 to 38, the letter Way may often be entirely omitted without destroying legibility. In phrase numbered 51 in Exercise, the word well is represented simply by writing the letter L. It will not be found to conflict with the word-abbreviation for will, even though written in the same position. This dropping of the Way hook in &AY'/ should not, however, be attempted when well is written alone. It is used only in junctures with other words. It is sometimes expedient to slight the formation of some words in order to accomplish phrase-writing; but such means will not interfere with the correct reading of the words so slighted. Note the formation of must in signs 79 and 80, a.nd Jst/>one andfestage, signs 74 and 75, etc. PHRASE POSITIONS. The general rule with most phonographers, when joining \vords, is to write the first word in its proper place-position, and let the ether words in the phrase accommodate themselves to the position of the first. There are times, however, when this rule will not apply. For in. stance, when some other word in the phrase requires, in order to be read correctly and with ease, that it shall be given its proper position in preference to commencing word. For the above reason, there are phrases, as well as words, that should occupy the second and third positions, even though the com- mencing word be a first-place word. Hence there are first-place, second- place and third-place phrases. A first-place phrase is one in which there occurs a word (either ini- tial, intermediate or final) which, in order to be read as joined, necessi- tates the placing of the entire phrase in the first position, above the line of writing. A few such phrases are illustrated by signs 41 to 48 in Exercise. A s.econd-place phrase is one in which the necessity of reading a certain word within it causes the entire phrase to be placed in the second position, on the line, as illustrated by signs 49 to 56 in Exercise. A third-place phrase is one in which the important word happens to be a third-place word and thus gives third position to the entire out- line, as illustrated by signs 57 to 64 in Exercise. Signs 65 to 73, inclusive, illustrate these three sorts of phrases comparatively, and by attentive notice of how a difference of position changes the meaning of the same phrase outline, students will find a rule for the proper placement of other phrases which they will come in contact with when engaged in actual work. No principle in phono- graphy is so unimportant that it may be only casually acquired, and memorizing these phrases will especially repay for the time consumed. WORDS COMMENCING WITH X AND Q. The compound sounds of the English letters X and Q prove the most difficult for the student to analyse when writing English words in which those sounds occur, or writing English words spelled with those letters. The purpose, therefore, of the first part of the Exercise to this lesion io to make this matter an easy one for the student, commencing with the presentation of an easy form for the sound of X, which is com- posed of the sounds short-e, K and S. Where that sound commences a word, the student need not spell it out in full, but can, instead, write a shaded circle like the circle Z, as in signs i to 16 in Exercise, This shaded circle readily does for the sound of X, beginning words, and in each instance will not be mistaken for the Z circle, for the circle Z always ends words. Use, therefore, a heavy circle for the sound of X beginning words, attaching to it the balance of the word, just as a halved R is added to that circle in sign i in Exercise, the whole outline being therein placed above the line, for the vowel in the last syllable ert in that outline for exert, is entitled to the position, the circle X taking any posi- tion, it only being necessary to indicate the principal vowel of the balance of the word. This X circle, being merely a shaded circle S, is added to all other characters on the same side as the circle S, the right or upper side of straight characters, and like the circle S, may denote the indication of R to the main consonant, by putting the X circle on the R side of straight consonants, just as the X circle is placed to the letter P in such words' as experience, sign 9 in Exercise, the shaded circle being read first, then the full consonant and next invisible R. Signs 185 to 187 illustrate words containing the sound of X inter- medially, as in the words next, mixed and fixed. Phonetically, these words are spelled n-e-k-s-t, next, m-i-k-s-d, mixed, f-i-k-s-d, _/?:< ______ 1 ...... 61 ...... 63...../r....61.... > >-N V ff v-^-Q j^arrr ^ 84- ?5 ..\ .... i.tt.jSy.s.$'&.'^.&9..i3t..\..3Z....133_J?.. 99- These differences and many others which the student should care- fully note, are plainly shown in this Exercise. It will be noticed that in sign 119 the preposition to is omitted in the word tomorrow, the outline for morrow being written in the third position to indicate the to in tomorrow, just as it is indicated in the phrase to be and to do, in list of Common Abbreviations in Lesson IX. This preposition to is often understood at the end of a phrase, without being written, as in signs 121 to 125. When a hyphen separates to from other words in the key, it implies that the outline represents the ad- dition of the to, on some occasions, and not on others, according to cir- cumstances. Signs 121 and 123 are allowable instances of abbreviation in the case of frequently occurring phrases, the former, in order or in order to being simply an N with an R hook, halved to add D, spelling Nerd, which is sufficient for that phrase, while sign 123 is an N, with Rel and Shun hooks, forming Inrels/iun, which nearly spells in relation-to. Both these outlines are placed in position for in. Sometimes the word to is indicated by halving an outline, as in sign 130, wherein the word able, of sign 129, is halved to indicate able to, as in sign 130. KEY XI. i, exert; 2, exercise; 3, exercisist; 4, exact; 5, exactly; 6, expect,; 7, except; 8, accept; 9, experience; 10, experienced; n, extend; 12, excel; 13, excellent; 14, examine; 15, examined; 16, examination; 17, queer; 18, query; 19, quaint; 20, quart; 21, quartz; 22, quarto; 23, quake; 24, quick; 25, quicken; 26, quadrant; 27, qualify; 28, quality; 29, quantity; 30, quinine; 31, quiet; 32, quote; 33, quota; 34, twill; 35, twig; 36, twelve; 37, require; 38, request; 39, cute; 40, curiosity; 41, I"am; 42, 1 am glad; 43, I am inclined; 44, if you; 45, if it is; 46, if it is not; 47, of course; 48, in all cases; 49, I may; 50, take you; 51, it may as well; 52, for you; 53, for it is; 54, for it is -known; 55, till you can; 56, in the same cases; 57, put you; 58, took you; 59, to whom; 60, has had it; 61, used some; 62, was not; 63, whom you will; 64, in some cases; 65, in each; 66, in which; 67, in much; 68, give these; 69, give this; 70, give thus (those); 71, and if; 72, and for; 73, and few; 74, postpone; 75, postage; 76, postal; 77, postal card; 78, you must; 79, you must be; 80, you must have; 81, bank; 82, surprise; 83, surprised; 84, eye; 85, aye; 86, eh; 87, ah; 88, now; 89, once; 90, hang; 91, impugned: 92, mainly; 93, meanwhile; 94, onto; 95, into; 96, unto; 97, distiller; '98, distillers; 99, distilleries; 100, adopt; 101, adapt; 102, adoption; 103, adaption;- 104, nevertheless; 105, notwithstanding; 106, here- after; 107, herein; 108, hereinafter; 109, hereinbefore; no, hereinto; in, hereunto; 112, hereon; 113, hereof; 114, heretofore; 115, hope to have; 116, I beg to say; 117, morrow; 118, the morrow; 119, to-morrow; 120, in order that; 121, in order-to; 122, in reply-to; 123, in relation-to; 124, in reference-to; 125, with reference-to; 126, reference; 127, reform; 128, per- form; 129, able; 130, able to; 131, to be able to; 132, read it; 133, shave it; ...... I? I J V V - P l9/rr*.i99.srz....,.2oo^Zols^,... 9 x ^~f \^> ^/ '.). 9 -^ o 32.... c t;^^> . ...c/N...8C.e. ............... '-t- ..i ...... J... \ ) X ri^ .ar^ - "VflX ov -T> ...... <_X ........ .............. * 1 34, make it; 135, take it; 136, have it; 137, of it; 138, of their; 139, of their own; 140, it ought; 141, it would-had; 142, it ought to have; 143, it would have; 144, it ought not; 145, it would-had not; 146, which ought; 147, which it; 148, which would have; 149, which will it; 150, such ought; 15 1, such would not; 152, such will have had; 153, subject; 154, subjection; 155, subjective; 156, business; 157, businesslike; 158, necessary; 159, necessarily; 160, United States; 161, Constitution of the United States; 162, Pennsyl- vania; 163, Pennsylvania railroad; 164, university; 165, University of Pennsylvania; 166, Universalism; 167, Lord Jesus Christ; 168, character; 169, children; 170, bachelor; 171, capable; 172, Catholic; 173, Roman Catholic; 174, Savior; 175, several; 176, visible; 177, technical; 178, dignity; 179, dogmatic; 180, discover; i8r, England-ish; 182, possible; 183, positive-ly; 184, system; 185, next; 186, mixed; 187, fixed; 188, popular; 189, public-ish; 190, publisher; 191, publication; 192, Republican; 193, republish; 194, workman; 195, workmen; 196, workingman; 197, working- men; 198, manufacture; 199, manufacturer; 200, manufactures; 201, manu- facturers; 202, advertisement; 203, advertisements; 204, advertising; 205, advertiser; 206, advertised; 207, especial-ly; 208, external-ly; 209, impossible,; 210, impossibility; 21 i, justification; 212, justification by faith; 213, repre- sent; 214, representation; 215, representative; 216, represented; 217, mis- represent; 218, misrepresentation; 219, misrepresented; 220, peculiar; 221, peculiar case; 222, peculiarly; 223, peculiarity; 224, respect-tul-ly; 225, salvation; 226, salvation of thesoul; 227, satisfy-fied; 228, satisfactory, 229, satisfaction; 230, scripture; 231, scriptural; 232, signify-fied; 233, significance; 234, significancy; 235, significant; 236, signification; 237, significative; 238, similar-ly; 239, similarity; 240, simple-y-fi-ed; 241, single-singular-ly; 242, singularity; 243, somebody; 244, special; 245, speak; 246, spoke; 247, spoken; 248, spinal column; 249, spiritual; 250, spiritualism; 251, spirit- ualist; 252, spirituality; 253, stenography; 254, stenographer; 255, stenogra- phic; 256, sometime; 257, somewhat; 258, substantial identity; 259, Supreme Being; 260, temperance society; 261, Oblige me, and while I write, you read those memoranda which you read before; 262, No sir, you can never construct a minimum or maximum jurisdiction; 263, The universe grows, as our knowledge of it expands; 264, Strange was the idea of the manufacturer who hoped co succeed with no advertising; 265, A special business needs the audience which is best secured by a satisfactory advertisement; 266, This memorandum of secession of part of the association last season was read, without ceasing, before the cessation of yesterday's session; 267, A desire to be somebody, though mere priue, is far more creditable than to be satisfied with being nobody; 268, Because his answer was not inscribed in juxtaposition with signatures on the opposite page of the book, the man- ager was dissatisfied; 269, The city of Jerusalem of old has been used to describe a state of future existence for the just in old pictures an arch- angel is seen guarding it while its inhabitants sleep; 270, Providence deals not in the impossible, but seems always willing to influence knowledge to perform wonders for the person who utilizes extremity as a justification for reform in business methods; 271, I speak especially of the respect which should be shown to Scripture as representing a peculiar spiritual revelation which must instruct by its acknowledged external strength even to those who may not see in it a necessarily saving significance. LESSON XII. HALF-LENGTH ABBREVIATIONS. Between ..\ Body Beauty, about .~.Quit-e .7". God X.After C Thought Without C Throughout c< On either hand On the other hand C .;...Establish-ed-ment X..A.stonish-ed-ment ...^.. Met Imme'diate-ly Gentlemen -ing-ly ;ord & acc'fe ...{/...Gentleman Agent ... Nature -d Tonight ...t9...0n the one hand ...W.. Hundred, hand Under / ..o*... Certain .Creature , ace Accurate ly <\ Particular-ly .Cannot ..A ....Opportunity ...r-3.. Account, on Consequent <: ...?. Plaintiff .. Behind Foundation ..S.... Subsequent , Movement With the above list, all the abbreviating word-forms have been given necessary, with the derivative abbreviations which may be made from them, for a speed of over 300 words a minute, if well memorized and used in connection with the other instruction given in these lessons, the pres- ent list being the shortest, and, in reality, also the easiest memorized, becatise most of the Half-length Word-abbreviations contain nearly the entire consonant elements of the words they represent. These abbrevia- tions are subject to the same plan of derivative word-building as the other list. Thus, the circle-S may be added to any sign, making thoughts of thought; ing may be added to form establishing from establish; and combi- nations such as joining the signs for behind and hand may be made, as in sign 269, forming the phrase behindhand, etc., etc. Other short-hand authors have taken the trouble to compile cum- brous phonographic dictionaries, containing brief forms for many thou- sands of English words, thus conveying to learners the false impression that it was necessary for them to learn innumerable word-signs before they could become adept at the art of the shorthand writer. The author of this work, therefore, desires to assure all who may labor under sucii an impression, that it is an erroneous one, the most skilled phonogra- phers of the day not using more than are contained in these lessons. And, in fact, such phonographic dictionaries do not contain more, their ten or twenty thousand outlines being nothing more than variations of the ones these lessons contain, but arranged so that they seem more, and, so arranged, require years to learn, even by the few that can mem- orize them at all. In these lessons we give all the root abbreviations from which are formed all the^other words those useless shorthand dic- tionaries contain, and our explanation enables the student to make them better than a dictionary can show him, while in addition he will have the principle at his fingers' ends. Another equally useless work is the phrase book issued by other authors, and made only to sell. It requires years to memorize phrases thoroughly in that shape. We give, in Lessons VIII and IX, the simple rules which govern them all, and in those and -Lessons X to XII sufficient examples to enable students, for themselves, to properly make an}' others. The Half-length Abbreviations would not conflict with the word- signs, even if both were made about the same size, but it is best to distin- guish them by writing the word-signs much smaller than the half-length abbreviations, as directed in previous lesson. THE HUMERAL 5. ..o..The ciphei ..c.-.l. ........ ..%...$ ..^..3 ..W...4 .:x5 , _..6 ..)....* L.. ..J..10 ./?.4i .1.12 ../J3 ..u.i4 ...D..15. ...^.16 ..j...4y. ..j...l ..J/..-80 ..S...3O..... ..^...40..... ...-,..#0..... ..60 ...;..>tt ...l..^. ..O..4OO... .\>..200.. .J>..3oo. ..k>,.400... .~3)..500... -0..600.. ..&.%OO..'. .3. ..ffoo... .L.iooo ..+..2OOO. ^r 3OOO. ...1,000,000 ^.^000,000 ^{.dOOOOOO .^4000 .^..30OO ^..000. .r.fooo.. Jlftwa. ^4,000,000 ^3,000,000 T.. '6,000,000 .^.^.000,000 y^.f ,00 o f ooo ^9,000,000 .^..9. ..^...19 - $o ..^>..900... A.9000 The adoption of shorthand signs for the Arabic numerals has been attempted by .writers on shorthand before the compilation of these les- sons, but such attempts have been of the crudest character imaginable, one author employing as many as three different signs to represent each Arabic numeral, all of which certainly tends to confuse rather than en- lighten the pupil, or save time for him. Again, they have been ob- jectionable from another reason, that of being entirely arbitrary in their character, not a single symbol being used which would phonetically afford any clew whatever to its meaning. In the list presented on foregoing pa^e, however, the author believes, will be found that unity of character wnich is so important in a matter of this kind. By looking carefully over the numeral list, the student cannot fail to recognize the simplicity of its arrangement and its entire legibility. The figure i is represented by its word-abbreviation, and 2 by the word- sign for its common name. The other figures are each represented by a conspicuous consonant element of their several names, the figure 3 be- ing a letter R, 4 a letter F, 5 a letter V, 6 a letter K, 7 a letter S, 8 is spelled in full, and 9 is a letter N; 10 is spelled in full, n and 12 partly so, while the "teens" are represented as in 13, 14, etc., by halving the original sign to add the sound of T, and concluding with an N hook; 20 is practically spelled in full, 30 is indicated by simply halving the pri- mary letter representing the numeral 3, and similarly with 40, 50, etc. A small circle- S is used for the cypher, because it most resembles the .unit, and from this principle the word hundred is properly represented by a large Ses circle; thousand is well represented by the phonographic con- sonant Ith, and the letter L does for million. The adding of the "teens" in which the hook is read after the halv- ing principle, can of course, only be applied to our figures. In regular spelling the phonographer must read the hook before the halving principle. At first students will be disposed to fear that these phonographic numerals will conflict seriously with their word-abbreviations. But, if they persevere in the use of them, they will find this to be anything but the case, especially if they have much figure work in/which to make use of these signs. In writing some ordinal numbers, such as second, twenty-first, etc., a full phonographic outline is preferable, as in signs 6, 4, etc., in Exer- cise, but where the name of the number ends with ///, that part of an ordinal must be omitted, or it will conflict with the sign for thousand. Compare signs 42 and 43 in Exercise. Sixteenth, written without the ///, as in sign 42, would never be mistaken for sixteen when met with in a sentence. Signs 25, 34, 41, etc., representing fourth, ffth, sixth, etc., will be seen to be the same signs as four, Jive, six, etc., in the table cf numerals. In joining these phonographic numerals where the word thousand or million are intended, though omitted, it is best to join the signs in groups, separating such groups at the point wherein the words thousand or million would have occurred had they been spoken, as in sign 74 of Exercise. In the same manner, the words dollars, pounds' (sterling) and shillings should be indicated when omitted, as in signs 75 and 76. But it is best not to omit those words in sentences where the context would not indi- cate them. In book-keeping no numeral junctures whatever are allow- able, excepting in dates or prices, as the columns of amounts require the figures to be written separately in order to add them. For that reason, calculations by multiplication, subtraction or division must all be made by separated figures, as in examples 77 to 80 of Exercise. Other than the above exceptions, the more figures joined the better. Where the sign for thousand would be difficult of juncture to a hooked figure, such hook is run into a circle, as in signs 24 and 29, pro- viding the circle of straight letters is placed on the N-hook side. Such transformation of the hook on curved letters, which makes them into a circle, as in sign 29, will not be mistaken for a cipher, because the cipher is only used separately never joined. It is only the large circle for hundred that is ever joined. The hundred circle can be joined upon the most convenient side of either straight or curved characters, as in signs 69 to 73 in Exercise. In instances where the large circle for hundred will not readily join, that word can be represented by a shaded halved N of the Half-length Abbreviations, shown in sign 32 in Exercise. Signs i and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 to n, etc., etc., etc., in Exercise, are placed near each other for the purpose of showing the stu- dent their contrasting outlines. Lest there should be any misunderstanding in regard to the use of the shorthand numerals, a considerable part of the Exercise of this lesson . is devoted to their illustration. Signs 9, 10 and n illustrate how to distinguish between 3, third, and 30. The first and last named are not apt to give trouble by clashing, provided the halving principle is carefully observed, but as some students are apt to wrongly halve the R of three to indicate third, this last word is shown as in sign 10. When possible, the word the should be indicated by the letter I, in junctures \viih numerals, when there can be no conflic- tion with a halved R of thirty, in instances where the proper sign must be joined. If joined at all to numerals, the should therefore appear as in the phrase the first, sign 13 in Exercise, seldom as in phrase the second, sign 15, though, as a rule, it is best not to join the or any word to numerals. In junctures with other numerals, the student should remember that 30, 40, etc., are not always halved, being distinguished from 3, 4, etc., by sort of junctures shown in signs 19, 20, 46, etc., just as with the ordinary Arabic numerals used in print. For instance, in writing the Arabic numerals, 34, 75, etc., one does not show the cipher of the 30 or 70 which compose them, the added figures 4 and 5 of 34 and 75 taking the place of the cipher which would otherwise be there, and hence, in shorthand, 3 and 4 make 34, and 7 and 5 make 75, just as they do in our common Arabic numbers. To write a halved 3 for 30, and then add a 5 to it in shorthand would be as misleading and wrong as to add the Arabic figures 30 and 4, as they would make 304 instead of 34. So the student should remember that the numerals 3, 4, etc., are only halved to indicate the cipher of 30, 40, etc., and therefore this should only be done when they are either written alone, as in signs n, 30, etc., or appear at the end of an outline, as in sign 72 in Exercise. Therefore, remember that when the shorthand numerals are joined together, 3 and 4 make 34, 7 and 5 make 75, etc., etc., none of the letters being halved. This ex- plains the letter R for 3, of signs 12 and 14 of Exercise, the R for 30 being made full length because it has another letter after it to show that the R means 30. For the same reason, when we write 33, we should write two full-sized letters R, joined together as in sign 16, which really forms a double-length R. Of course,. when we want to write 30,000, etc., the R is plainly shown to be halved, for the reason that it is there necessary; but if it were 34,000, the R should be written full-sized. The lower end of the letter S for 7, had better be slanted a little to the left, almost like an Ish, which will plainly distinguish the S of 7 from the V of 5, even in the most rapid writing. Care should be exercised in these numerals, as well as in any principle of phonography, but not more so, and if the halving principle is observed strictly and the other hints herein given, the shorthand numerals will be found to be as legible as the ordinary figures, and far more rapid, being, in fact, the only plan by which a number of figures can be taken verbatim when read at a convention, or occurring in court cases. The numeral 9 and its derivatives, 90 and 19, particularly the two latter, should have the right end written a little higher than the left end. as in sign 61. This will prevent junctures with other characters causing it to conflict with the figure 4 and its derivatives. In all junctures where you intend a full-sized figure, be sure to make it full-size, and your halved characters less than halved, if possible, a rule which is equally applicable to any shorthand outline. The figure eight, in the list of shorthand numerals, is spelled in full. This should always be done when it is written alone, as in signs 53 to 55, and if it is the first numeral in a juncture w r ith other characters, as in sign 70; but, when it is the second character, or in any instance where it is preceded by another figure, the vowel A is omitted from it and only the letter T used for 8. This adding of the letter A to 8 and its derivatives, 80 and 18, when written alone, furnishes a complete plan of distinction between the shorthand 80 and the letter A of our Alpha- bet. Note the difference between the outlines in signs 89 and 90. Fractions are sometimes spelled in full, as in signs 81 and 83, but may be written, and should be ordinarily, as in signs 82 and 84 to 87; that is, just as one would unite the common Arabic fractions, omitting the lines which separate denominator and numerator in ordinary English- Arabic fractions, as such line is unnecessary. Just as one when a word-numeral, occurring alone in a sentence, is spelled in full, as in sign 85 of Lesson VIII, so should any numeral be when alone in a sentence, nine being spelled with a letter N and hook-N above the line, etc., in such instances. PROPER NAMES AND INITIALS. The writing in shorthand of proper names and initials being a necessary element to speed in shorthand, since no person can write a proper name in long-hand quickly enough to do verbatim reporting, par- ticular directions are necessary respecting this important subject before concluding the instructions in these lessons. We, therefore, devote several lines of our Exercise to this, beginning with sign 91. The list of initials pretty thoroughly treats of that branch, and the writing of proper names was somewhat explained in an earlier lesson, but there is one point in particular that was not dealt upon viz: the writing of vowels disjoined in those few instances where it may be advisable, such as in the name of Pike, sign 91; Peck, sign 92; Boyd, sign 94, and in other instances shown herein. The rules which have been given for making vowel junctures are sufficient for most purposes, excepting where the phonetic outline has been written without the visible vowel, in in- stances where the writer thought it unnecessary at the time, but wherein the writing of subsequent word outlines caused the reporter to fear they might clash with others before written, and he, therefore, has thought it advisable to turn back and insert the vowel. Where this is desired, the vowel can be inserted, as in the instances above illustrated, so long as it is placed between the consonants to which it is to be read, or at least directly after the consonant which immediately precedes it, as in signs 91, 92 and 94, so that it will be read immediately following the proper consonant. In those instances it is comparatively easy to do this, as it also is in the word Price in sign 97, but where the proper name written has been partially formed by a hook, and the vowel is to be read between the main consonant and the hook, then the vowel should be struck through the main consonant, which will indicate that it must be read immediately after the main consonant, and before the hook, just as the vowel E, struck through the letter P in outline for the word Pierce, in sign 96, is read after the Pand before the hook R. This will show the distinction between the word Price in sign 96, and the word Pierce in sign 97, aside fyrom the difference in the vowel sound. The vowel Ow may be written upward, when it is desired to write Hay downwards, but when Ow is written downwards, it is necessary to write Hay upward. This is illustrated in signs 106 and 107. Many other peculiarities are also illustrated in this Exercise respecting the writing of proper names. A distinction should be made in some titles. For instance, Miss is of course written with the letter M and circle S above the line, as in sign 98, and Mrs. should be written as in sign 100, that is, with a Sez circle attached to the letter M, as this is the exact sound of that word, but for the word Misses, the plural of Miss, as it occurs very seldom, there should be a distinct form, and it is therefore written with two small circles-S attached to the letter M, as in sign 99. This will clearly distinguish Mrs. from Misses, which are both pronounced the same, and to which the context generally furnishes no key. The word Katie is written several ways in this Exercise, sign 99 showing it with a vowel ah substituted for a to make a juncture. Some easily read words, names and titles are not vocalized either with visible vowel or position. See sign 93, etc., icf Exercise. All the substitutions of visible vowels for each other, as shown in this Exercise, are in accordance with the explanations regarding same, given in Lesson IV, to which the student is referred. The principle of spelling the sounds of a letter by the union of visible characters, as described in Lesson III in regard to X and Q, extends also to the representation of all consonants when it is desired to represent the initials of people's names, but not to the vowels. The Roman vowels A, E, I, O or U, when such vowels are used as the initials of personal names, are represented by our phonographic visible, vowels, as in signs 98 and 104 in Exercise. But the names of the Roman consonants, when pronounced, always possess a broader sound, and therefore, when representing initials, should be actually spelled with visible signs, as: b-e, B; c-e, C; etc., etc., as in Exercise. This spelling of the sound of letters when they are initials rep- resenting personal names, gives them a distinctive appearance and enables a reporter always to recognize an initial at a glance. Other- wise, a plain initial might be mistaken in hurriedly written phono .jrapny for a word. The following is the complete list: INITIALS. V 1^ \ r I SYLLABLE ABBREVIATIONS. An efficient means of avoiding some very cumbrous written forms is that of abbreviating the phonographic outlines of a number of the prefixes and affixes of our language. And, as this method of syllable- abbreviation can be affected without the least sacrifice to legibility, it becomes a very important factor in rapid writing. All works on phonography present this principle, but as most of the abbreviations recommended by their authors cannot be joined to the rest of the words of which they are a part, they therefore fail to give any extra speed in writing. The time saved by their abbreviation of form is lost by the time consumed in lifting the pen or pencil from the paper, in disjoining, it being a much slower method to write two dis- joined characters than even a half dozen joined ones. The method taught herein, by being both abbreviated in form and easy of juncture, gives extra speed from two sources, besides relieving writers of the pos- sibility, common to those old methods, of mistaking the disjoined por- tions of a word for separate words. There are, of course, many more prefixes and affixes in use in our language than presented in the lists herein explained, but those not found here are either of very infrequent occurrence, or are ones not in need of abbreviation, such as the affixes ly, ness, etc., whose ordinary phonographic outlines are sufficiently brief in themselves. PREFIXES. Con, Com or Cog. These short prefixes (as one is not at all likely ever to clash with either of the others) are represented by the same sign the consonant outline K, which is joined as in signs in to 1 18 in Ex- ercise. This use of the phonographic K to express the sounds of con or .com, etc., when prefixes, is in accord with the construction of the word- abbreviation for the words can or come, which words the student will re- member are also represented by the letter K. When the syllables con .com or cog are not prefixes, but occur between other syllables of a word, they may still be represented as though prefixes, as in signs 123 to 125. In word's in which con and com occur together, it is best to write con in full as in sign 122 in Exercise. Accom is formed by adding a short-a to the letter K, of the prefix com, as in signs 119 to 121. Contra, Contri, Contra or Counter are represented by a halved K in most cases. Signs 141 to 144. Exceptional instances are junctures with the letters K or Gay wherein the N hook is added to the prefix as in sign 145. In this instance the part of the prefix count is spelled, the prefix taking position of Ow. Circum or Self are represented by the circle S, as in signs 148 and 153. When the circle S also begins the next syllable, as it does in stance, in the word circumstance, enlarge the S circle of stance to indicate the addition of circum, as in sign 149; write it within an initial hook, as in sign 147. for and Fore are represented the same as the word for is expressed in list of Common Abbreviations in Lesson IX i.e., by the phono- graphic letter F. Signs 155 and 156, this Exercise. In and Un, when joined preceding the circle S, may be very con- veniently expressed by a backward beginning hook, as in signs 157 to 166. In, as a word, may also be similarly indicated. Phrase 161 in Exercise. Intel, Inter, Enter, Intro or Under are represented by a halved N joined as in signs 167 to 173. e, Magna and Magni may be expressed in a few words, such ify, magnitude, etc., by the phonographic consonant M, as in sign 174 to 177. AFFIXES. Ble, Ely or Bility are represented by the phonographic stroke B, as" in signs 180 to 183. Bleness, by joining a letter N and circle S to the letter B, as in sign 182. For or Fore as affixes, and Ful, are indicated by the same sign as when prefixes. See signs 186, 187 and 194 in Exercise. Ful or Full may be indicated by an F hook to some words, as in sign 1 88. N and a circle S can be added to this book to represent fulness \ as in sign 189. Ing, as an affix, is represented by the phonographic letter N, as in sign 196. Ings and Ingly are therefore properly written as in signs 200 and 201. To some halved characters, where the letter N nor Ng does not jin well, it is preferable to attach a small horizontal curved line similar to the juncture of short-u and U, as in sign 203 in Exercise. The circle S can be attached to this hook when necessary, as in sign 204. Mental or Meniality are each expressed by a halved M, terminating with an N hook, as in signs 209 and 210. Ment is, of course, written the same. See sign 208. Self and Sameness, as affixes, are represented by the same sign used for the prefix self the circle S. Signs 211 to 215. Selves &&& Lessncss are represented by the Ses circle, as in signs 216 to 222 in Exercise. Ship, as an affix, is represented by the phonographic letter Ish, as in sign 223, etc. Soever is expressed by a joined circle S and an R. Signs 225 to 227 in Exercise. Ted, as a concluding phonographic syllable, in instances wherein a halved letter T cannot well be joined, can be represented by the double tick shown in sign 230 in Exercise, such double tick somewhat resem- bling a juncture of two letters Hay, the first written upwards, and the second downward. Ded is indicated by shading the downward stroke of this tick, as in sign 231. When ted or ded can be spelled out, it is done as in sign 232. THE USE OF THE PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. In making use of the phonographic prefixes and affixes students are probably more apt to lose sight of the two grand principles of phone- graphic writing sound spelling and outline-brevity than in any other range of practice. Hence the necessity for extra caution. Remember, the prefix for com, con or cog represents the sounds of those prefixes, not simply the letters; and therefore the sign for those prefixes may also represent the sounds for conn or comm, as in the word commend, which is therefore correctly written, as in sign 112 in Exercise, that word being phonographically spelled kom-end, according to the rule of brevity in word-outline. Frequently the prefixes com or con, or the affix ing, may be alto- gether omitted from some words, the context being generally a sure in- dication of their omission. See signs 126 to 140 and others in Exercise. Where one sign is used to express different prefixes or affixes (as K for com, con or cog, and B for ble, bly or bility) the groups are those in which there is no danger of mistaking which word the sign is intended for at the time. The instances are very rare wherein words containing abbreviated prefixes or affixes can be phrased with other words; and, when done, the word containing the affix or prefix must occupy its proper place position, no matter in what position the other words of the phrase are thus com- pelled to be placed. Furthermore, whether written alone or in phrases, ail words containing abbreviated prefixes or affixes take position in ac- cordance with the principal vowel sound contained in the main portion of the word, not the vowel-sound of the prefix or affix. Prefixes or affixes are only secondary to the rest of the words to which they may be attached, and are therefore subject to no particular position, occupying simply whatever position the rest of the word may give them by their own position. For instance, contradict, sign 141 in Exercise, is written in the first position to indicate the vowel sound of the syllable diet, thus compelling contra to be written above the line, even though the vowel sounds of contra are second-place ones In brief, the prefixes and affixes are to be treated precisely as though they contained no vowel element whatever. Ccmpare signs 111 and 112. The prefixes in our language which are not given in abbreviated form in these lessons are spelled in full, and mostly they are such simple ones as that of re in regret, regard, etc., and these prefixes, like the others illustrated, must not be purposely given their vowel position, for the balance of the word is entitled to the position. For instance, in regard, the main portion of the word, the syllable gard, must have the position, as in sign 178, while gret takes position as in sign 179. This dis- t'-.quishes clearly between those words, and the rule must be observed in all dealings with prefixes, which never take their vowel-position ex- cept by accident, the rest of the word being entitled to the position. Were it not for this rule, one could never distinguish regret from regard, a very important matter. In some words it may be somewhat difficult for the student to de- cide which prefix belongs to a word for instance, whether the prefix con or contri should be written to the word contribute. In that word the difficulty is caused by the last vowel of contri not being very conspicu- ous, and also by the fact that tribute being a word of itself the student is therefore apt to think the prefix in this case should be con. This would be an erroneous impression, however, contri being the proper prefix. The rule is to use the briefest form consistent with legibility. PHRASE COMBINATIONS. Beginning with signs 205, 206, 207 and 240 in this Exercise, and ending with sign 307, are given a number of phrase combinations, some- times made up of word-abbreviations, joined often with unimportant words omitted, and sometimes abbreviated in an apparently arbi- trary manner, the object being to gain an outline the most service- able for speed with legibility, they representing, as a rule, phrases which are uttered very rapidly, and whose outlines in any other shape could not be written rapidly. They cover the entire field of political orations, sermons, legal arguments, and work where the utmost rapid- ity is absolutely essential, and, as they represent also the most read- able forms, their position and outlines are strictly observed by all pro- fessional writers of importance, and should be learned as thoroughly and religiously as any principle in these lessons, or the word-abbrevia- tions. Be sure, however, to make that portion of them halved which is shown as halved, keeping full-sized portions full-size where herein shown, observing carefully their position, as well as the size of their hooks, circles and loops. They are the best outlines for these combinations of words, look like nothing else than what they are, if correctly written, and thus furnish exact distinctions between each other, and between outlines which are not illustrated in any lessons, but which may happen unawares in actual work. They are of vast importance, both to speed and legibility. Lest students should imagine that it is necessary for professional phonographers to allow a speaker to be a few words in advance of them, in order to write in their proper position the kind of phrases referred to in the preceding paragraphs on phrasing, the author would state that such a condition is not necessary. With a rapid speaker, such is natur- ally the case, and then, it is by means of these beautiful phrase methods and abbreviations that a lagging shorthand writer is enabled to catch up with a speaker momentarily excited. To further illustrate the explanation in last lesson respecting how, for purposes of phrasing, joined words are often written out of position, the student is referred to the phrase / am glad, sign 42 in Exercise to last lesson, wherein the word glad, although properly, according to its vowel, belonging on the line, is written, in such combination, above the line, because its position when joined is not important, and the word am must have the first position or it will clash with may, in most instances. This will explain why the word course, in the phrase of course, is written above the line in sign 47 in the Exercise to last lesson, it being neces- sary for the word of to have proper position. Signs 48, 56 and 64 of Exercise to last lesson, and which occur immediately under each other in that Exercise, illustrate this rule still more plainly. In each of those phrases the word cases occurs, and each time in a different position. In the first instance, cases is written above the line, because the word in, of that phrase in all cases, must have first position. In the third in- stance, sign 64 of the Exercise to last lesson, cases is in the third position because the word some of that phrase in some cases, must be written under the line or it will clash with same, sign 56, Exercise to last lesson. Similar instances will be found in this lesson, as in sign 244, Exer- cise to this lesson, wherein, in the phrase Son of God, the word God which when alone is written in first position, is, in sign 244 of this lesson, writ- ten in the third position under the line, because the word Son, to be read, must have that position. OMITTED WORDS. One of the most frequently occurring words in the English language is the word to, and, as it requires almost as much time to write as a much longer word, the author, early in his professional experience, adopted a method by which to may frequently be indicated without be- ing written. This is done by writing a succeeding word near the lou N 5,472 80, 79,685 *,453 1,423 4,104 78, 246 79, 29,468 359 15,379 239,055 3,492 178 1,593,70 3,420 31,864,0 783 79,685 720 113,381,755 36 1 36)- 684 ]9 81, half; 82, 1-2; 83, quarter; 84, 1-4; 85, 3-4; 86, 7-8; 87, 5-18; 88, Box 18; 89, Box 80; 90, Drawer A; 91, H. V. Pike; 92, Charles G. R. Peck; 93, Sir Robert Beale; 94, J. George Boyd, Esq.; 95, Mr. Henry X. Train; 96, Alexander S. Pierce; 97, Messrs. B. & F. Z. Price; 98, Miss Katie I. Coombs; 99, Misses Sarah and Katie Y. Marr; 100, Mrs. Louisa N. Tott; 101, Anthony T. W. Shirley; 102, Island of Cuba; 103, Commodore Coots; 104, Ada O. L. Dawn; 105, Teresa M. Q. Chawter; 106, Maria E. C. Howe; 107, Sophia P. Howe; 108, Isaac D. Hugg; 109, Frank K. Stowe; no, Ger- trude U. Hoover; in, command; 112, commend; 113, compassion; 114, concurrent; 115, confession; 116, confuse; 117, confusion; 118, cognate; 119, accommodate; 120, accommodation; 121, accompany; 122, concomi- tant; 123, decompose; 124, misconstrue; 125, unaccompanied; 126, com- mence; 127, commenced; 128, commences; 129, complete; 130, comple- tion; 131, consider; 132, consideration; 133, considerate; 134, constituent; 135, constitute; 136, constitution; 137, recognize; 138, recognition; 139, recommend; 140, recommendation; 141, contradict; 142, contribute; 143, contribution; 144, controvert; 145, counteract; 146, counterfeit; 147, circumflex; 148, circumjacent; 149, circumstance; 150, circum- stances; 151, self-evident; 152, self-esteem; 153, selfish; 154, forfeit; ^ 155, forswear; 156, forewarned; 157, in (the) experience; 158, inexperie;. td; 159, instrumental; 1 60, insult; 161, in seeming; 162, in as many as possible; 163, unseemly; 164, unselfish; 165, unstrung; 166, unscrew; 167, entertain; 168, interest; 169, introduce; 170, intelligent; 171, intellectual; 172, under- stand; 173, understood; 174, magnesia; 175, magnify; 176, magnificence; 177, magnanimous; 178, regard; 179, regret; 180, nobly; 181, feeble; 182, feebleness; 183, unstability; 184, whatever; 185, whoever; 186, therefor-e; 187, wherefore; 188, careful; 189, carefulness; 190, doubtful; 191, faithful- ness; 192, powerful; 193, truthful-ly; 194, useful; 195, usefulness; 196, beginning; 197, doing; 198, seeing; 199, racings; 200, musings; 201, know- ingly; 202, owing; 203, building; 204, spreadings; 205, everlasting; 206, everlasting life; 207, everlasting love; 208, supplement; 209, fundamental; 210, instrumentality; 211, himself; 212, myself; 213, itself; 214, yourself; 215, gladsomeness; 216, yourselves; 217, themselves; 218, of ourselves; 219, to ourselves; 220, by ourselves; 221, carelessness; 222, thoughtlessness; 223, courtship; 224, friendship; 225, wheresoever; 226, whensoever; 227, whoso- ever; 228, whosesoever; 229, fellowship; 230, dated; 231, dreaded; 232, freighted; 233, voted; 234, plentitude; 235, not to call; 236, right to the last; 237, sensitive to the touch; 238, habits of birds; 239, efforts of the press; 240, Kingdom of Heaven; 241, Kingdom of Christ; 242, Church of Christ; 243, Throne of Grace; 244, Son of God; 245, Word of God; 246, Works of God; 247, choice of the people; 248, member of the press; 249, members of the Legislature; 250, members of Congress; 251, members of Parliament; 252, not to be; 253, not to have been; 254, little by little; 255, insult upon insult; 256, in the world; 257, on account of the fact; 258, on the one hand; 259, on the other hand; 260, on either hand; 261, on the contrary; 262, more or less; 263, every one of us; 264, off and on; 265, again and again; 266, around and around; 267, hand in hand; 268, under- hand; 269, behind-hand; 270, some one or other; 271, somehow or other; 272, as well as; 273, as good as; 274, as great as; 275, as soon as; 276, as soon as possible; 277, as a matter of course; 278, as a matter of fact; 279, the best and worst; 280, the first and second; 281, the first and last; 282, the first and least; 283, the first thing; 284, the first subject; 285, the first position; 286, in the first place; 287, in the second place; 288, in the third place; 289, in the next place; 290, in the last place; 291, in the least place; 292, at least; 293, at last; 294, utilized; 295, has met; 296, at first; 297, at length; 298, at the rate of; 299, at any rate; 300, at all times; 301, at all events; 302, at the same time; 303, at the present time; 304, between them; 305, although; 306, could not; 307, A creature of God; 308, Gentlemen throughout; 309, To-night -the beauty of that heavenly body will be particularly noticeable; 310, According to custom the world means the people; 311, The establishment is not in the nature of a corporation; 312, An accurate use of words is indispensable to the orator; 313, Begin no new movement without quite a good deal of proper thought; 314, The foundation (the stone-work) under the house was poor its consequent fall was about certain; 315, Opportunities must be seized immediately, if at all after they pass, it is too late; 316, The plaintiff gave subsequent testimony which aston- ished the hundred opposing witnesses; 317, The agent is certainly a gentle- man I cannot account for his action toward you to-night; 318, They were onte the conquerors of the East they were once the keepers of the Shekinah. Copyright 1891, by Curtis Haven. ooi-.i_,EOTioisr nsro. i. OF HAVEN'S SELECTED LISTS OF ACTUAL BUSINESS LKTTKRS. Containing all the Ordinary Words, Terms and Phrases Occurring in Actual Busi- ness, Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting Practice, with Words Counted and Numbered for Timing Speed. 1OO Letters Price 10 Cents. [EXPLANATION. Every twenty-five words are marked (25), (50) or (75) and every hundred words are shown by black figures, (1), (2), (3) etc., representing 100, 200, 300, etc., respectively. Such figures are not to be read as part of the letters.] 1. Dear Sir: We cannot be guided by what those houses maybe willing to do, as it was our option to have you ship the (25) goods to whoever we desired, and as said once before, we wrote you that we would prefer you to turn them over to someone else. (50) We have done the very best we could for you and really see no occasion for any reduction, or any ill feeling on your part. (75) 2. Gentlemen: We still feel that it would benefit your goods to put them on the rebate plan in Canada. We have spoken to two or (1) three dealers, and find theii views coincide with ours on this point. Our idea is if jou proposed it, all would at once cordially fall [25] in line. Messrs. H.M. Sweitzerte Co. have not had the slight- est hitch, since they began it, that we have heard of, and we [50] sell large lots of goods with perfect satisfaction, and no trouble as to prices. 3. Gents: We are in receipt of a bill Oct. 9th, for (75) goods amounting to $30.00. We are informed that these goods were ordered by the \V right Mercantile Co. of your agent here and there is (2) no excuse whatever for your charging them to us. The Wright Mercantile Co. is a sub-let department in our store and is entirely re- sponsible for (25) goods sold to them, but it is of course a great deal of trouble and confusion to have our accounts mixed up wi^h theirs and (50) we will not permit it under any circumstances. Very respectfully, 4. Gents: Enclosed herewith we send you the bill of cloaks delivered to your de- partment in (75) our store and charged to W. P.& Co. We do not see what necessity there is for doing any thing of this kind, and, (3) on the other hand, it causes con- fu>ion in our office. We have nothing to do with this maker and we trust you will omit sending (25) us bills of this sort hereafter or charging goods belonging to your department in the store, or buying goods in our name to be delivered (50) to your department. Respectfully, 5. Dear Sir: We have your favor of the tenth hist., referring to an order given vou for business cards of our (75) company, by a man purporting to be our agent under the real or assumed name of Cook, on receipt of which we wired you his (4) description and have just a reply. We are unable to identify the man from the de- scription you have kindly given, but from his youth we (25) would judge him to be a new adventurer in the field, who is getting up his stationery and making other pre- parations to become a professional (50) swindler under the guise of a traveling man We hope soon to be advised of his detection and arrest. Yours very truly, 6. Dear Sir: In [75] order for us to check up the articles you wrote and which are unpaid for, we must receive from you a list of the titles [5] of the articles in question. Please furnish us with same promptly and oblige. 7. Dear Sir: We certainly must request you to send at once for (25) the note returned to vou. Monev is very tight now and we must make collections. Please attend to this at once and oblige. 8. Dear Sir: (50) I send you by return mail a catalogue. The only young stla- Copyright 1891, by Curtis Haven. IsTO. 1 OF HAVEN'S SELECTIONS OF ACTUAL - COURT TESTIMONY, Containing the Ordinary Words, Terms and Phrases used in General Court Trials Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting Practice, with Words Counted and Numbered for timing speed. 1O,000 Words-Price 10 Cents. [EXPLANATION. In this printed court testimony only such omissions and changes have been made as were considered necessary to disguise the identity of the parties to the suit. Each 25 words are numbered [25], [50] and [75]; every hundred words being indicated by the black figures [1], [J3], [3], etc. Such figures are not to be considered as any part of the reading matter.] MORNING SESSION. B. C. STARR, a witness for tire prosecu- tion, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By U. S. Attorney Winn: Mr. Starr' [25] what is your business? A. I am an employe of Clarence Carter. Q. Do you know S. F. Markham? A. I do. Q. What was his business at that [50] time? A. He was also employed by Mr. Carter. Q. Do you know Mr. Smith, the assist- ant general freight agent of the Minne- sota Railroad? A. I do. Q. And [75] Mr. Winters, who was the Carmine line agent? A. Yes, sir. Q. What was his official title? A. Agent of the Carmine Line and Minne- nesota Railroad. Q. And Mr. [1] Norton, did you know him? A. Yes, sir. Q. And Mr. Green? A. Yes sir. The Court. Whose employ was Nor- ton in? A. He was local agent of the [25[ Minnesota Railroad. Mr. Winn: What was Green's position? A. Contracting agent of the Minnesota Railroad. Q. What was Carter's business? A. Grain business. Q. Well, in what way? What ]5o] was he doing with grain? A. He was a shipper of grain. Q. Did he own any elevators or operate any? A. Yes, sir. Q. What elevators? A. He was [75] manager of the St. Paul elevator. Q. Where is that elevator located? A. Near Corwith, on the St. Paul road Q. Where is that? A. I could not say [2] exactly where it is. It is about five miles out of Chicago. Q. Will you state to the court whether at any time along in the [25] fall of iS8S you had any conversation with Smith or any of the other defend- ants in this case Mr. Winters or Mr. Norton [50] respecting the shipping of grain belonging to Carter from New York? A. Yes, sir; I did. Q, Just tell the jury in yo*ur own way briefly, the [75] history of that whole conversation or arrangement, whatever it was you had with these men or any of them? A. The arrangement that we had with [3] Mr. Smith, who was assistant general freight agent of the Min- nesota Railroad, was simply to haul grain from Chicago on what would be their pro- portion [25] of the through rate. Q. On what? A. On th^ir propor- tion of the through rate. Q. Through rate from where? A. Their proportion Q. Well, through rate from where? A. From [50] New York from no per cent, points. The Court: From what points* A. Anv Eastern point that their line made. Mr. W r inn: At their proportion [75] of the through rates from no per cent, points? A. Yes, sir. |l Q. What grain did that refer to grain originating where? A. Grain originat- ing in i.'hicago [4] in elevators, on prise deserves:' I trust their report [75] will receive your most careful attention, and that their recommendation will command the substantial approval which .they so eminently merit, because of their untiring devotion [t)B] to the interests of the cause. But, gentlemen, ignoring the consideration of self-interest, are we not bound in honor to support this company, whose [25] officers will to-day clearly demonstrate to you not only that they have done a successful business, but that they are worthy of your unreserved confidence [50J and cordial co-operation. I do not hesitate to say that I should esteem it a stain upon our good name should we fail heartily to [75] stand by this Child of our Association. The favorable decision rendered by Judge Hammond, in the United States Circuit Court in Western Tennessee, in April [O7] last, after a third trial, in the case of the Mansfield Drug Company vs. three eastern companies, is of vital interest to the entire drug [25] trade of the country, involving as it did, the hitherto untried issue of the liability of insurance companies for proprietary or compounded medicines prepared by [50] druggists. The trade is certainly under no small obligations to INI Mansfield & Co. for their tireless efforts in bringing the question to a final [75] test, and it is sincerely hoped that the decision will prove to the insurance companies at once a rebuke and a lesson. It is due [4)8] to the Druggists' Mutual Insurance Company to say, that it paid its loss promptly in this case as in every other. The report of the [25] Committee on Proprietary Goods, always one of the most important, will naturally elicit your closest attention. Even the man who was once arbiter of the [50] destines of Europe, the great Napoleon himself, met his Waterloo: but defeat is a word unknown in the vocabulary of the able and vigilant chairman [75] of that Committee, to whose unwearied energy we may attribute the comparatively few complaints of violation of the contract plan. Sincere gratitude is also due [Oi)l to the proprietors who have so faithfully stood by the committee, aiding it by both word and work. The few leading manufacturers who are still [25] without the fold we hope will yet see the fairness of the plan, and I respectfully recommend the in- coming committee to persevere in the effort [50] to secure the co-operation of the few recalcitrants not now committed to the contract plan a system which, while- it scarcely affords even a fair [75] profit for handling their goods, considering the great expense in conducting the business, not only affords a just protection to the manu- facturer, but at the [1OO] same time results in good alike to the consumer and the dealer. (10,012 words.) fig^The foregoing 10,000 words of convention report represent a supplement to Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting. See advertisement below. 1 s\r\ MISCELLANEOUS i C"TT CDC 1 f\ II II 1 ACTUAL BUSINESS L. fc. I I CL M O I I I I Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted I and numbered for timing speed, like above convention report, will.be I I V/ \y sent by C. HAVEN. Room 17, Tribune Bldg.. Chicago. 111., on receipt of 1 \*/ C. JA f\f\f\ WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT 1U,UUU TESTIMONY m Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for I Ip timing speed will be sent by ("'. HAVEN. Tribune Building, Chicago, Illinois, on receipt of I V/l)i /\ I I *T" l_| CT" /V P^ f""^ V/ F~~ It-tiers, testimony and convention prac- * ^ ~ * ^ ^^^^J\*^ >r L-^_ tice. and much more, together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by tin- NVw York Herttld, Philadelphia F/'e,s. Bo-ton Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies. and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary. society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descrip- tive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor you cannot afford to be without a copy. Price. $2.00 to the public -but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., Chicago. 111. ITEMS. Queen Victoria is the latest convert to type- writing. She is so pleased with this work that nowadays all orders, lists of guests, etc., in connection with the royal household are written by one. SURE RECIPE. He was warned against the woman She was warned against the man, And, ef that won't make a weddin', Wy, they's nothin' else that can. Jainrx W/iitfomb Biley . BENEFIT OF BENEFIT COMPANIES. "He has failed, has he? Extravagant liv- ing, I suppose?" " No ; you see he belonged to a number of benefit organizations and the assessments broke him." New York Press. New or Second hand of all makes, bought, sold, exchanged and repaired. Also rented anywhere in the country. Largest Stock in America. Not run by a Typewriter Manufacturer. Send for New Illustrated Catalogue describing all Machines. GERBER'S SUPPLIES. NATIONAL TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE 200 LaSalle Street, CHICAGO. ADVERTISING. IF you wish to advertise anything anywhere at any time write to GEO. P. KOWELL & CO., No. 10 Spruce St., Mew York. EVERY one in need of information on the subject of advertising will do well to obtain a copy of "Book for Advertisers," 368 pages, price one dollar. Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. Contains a careful compilation from the American Newspaper Directory of all the best papers and class journals; gives the circulation rating of every one, and a good deal of informa- tion about rates and other matters pertaining to the business of advertising. Address KO WELL'S ADVERTISING BUKEAU, 10 Spruce St., N. Y. NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 185 LI 8KLLE 8T,, GHIGIGO, Aiention this advertisement TTERS MISC ELLANEOUS ACTUAL, BUSINESS Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, will be sent to any address by C. HAVEN, TRIBUNE BUILDING, CHICAGO. ILLIXOIS, on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT TESTIMONY Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of I lOc. WORDS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of MII TLJIT AD f^ \/ C" Letters, testimony and convention practice, and much more, M LL. inc. MDVJVC. together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadelphia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor, you cannot afford to be without a copy. Price. S2.00 to the public but 1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., CHICAGO, ILL. HAVEN'S POPULAR MOCK LETTERS. TYPEWRITER ERASER FREE. Send your name and address at once. . . GAFFE Y'S SUPPLY OFFICE. New Haven, Conn (ist day.) MONDAY, JANUARY 2 d, 1870. Messrs. Wilson Bros., Burksville, Ala. GENTLEMEN: Please send the statement of unpaid bills which you have against us up to date, and greatly oblige. Respectfully yours. Messrs. Dennison 6 Lawrence, Dovepark, Clark Co., Ark. GENTLEMEN: We return bill dated February 28, amount $8.75. We presume that these goods were bought by the Wiley Mercantile Co.; they were never ordered by us. (2nd day.) TUESDAY, FEBRUARY ist, 1871. Mr. J. B. Black, 410 S. i$tA St., Oakland, Cal. DEAR SIR: We have received bill of $24.00 for advertising in Oakland Telegraph, and presuming it tojpe all right, have paid it. Please let me know by return mail, if it be correct. St. Joseph's Savings Bank, Denver, Colo. GENTLEMEN: The enclosed bank book and documents were picked up in our store to-day. Will you please see that they are returned to the owners, as we do not know where to address them? Very truly yours. (3rd day.) WEDNESDAY, MARCH 3rd, 1872. Messrs. T. Lewis & Son, Box 1213, New Haven, Conn. GENTLEMEN: We enclose letter from party in New Sharon. We have sent him catalogue and referred him to you for prices and terms. Hoping that you may be able to secure his custom, we remain, Yours truly. Mrs. Christine Martin, Rockland, Del. DEAR MADAM: We are. in receipt of notice from the American Express Co., stating that the package sent you of laces and embroideries is at their office in your town unclaimed. Please oblige us by calling on them for same. (4th day.) THURSDAY, MARCH 4 th, 1873. Messrs. Wilson Bedloe 6 Son, Freepert, Fla. GENTLEMEN: We have received several orders from local customers for you. What are your best discounts? Please notify us and we may give you a trial order and pei' ps do considerable business with you if prices are right. The H. B. Howe Co., Savannah, Ga. GENTLEMEN: Goods ordered on the first instant have been eceived, and must say that we are very much surprised and disappointed in them. The stock and finish is very poor and we cannot use them at ai-y price. They are nothing like samples shown us. What shall we do with them? -v )^ ..^...1. .>/..!. Jr. ..TO V ;?.._ J The balance of these letters, Shorthand and Key, 12 more pages, will be sent to address on receipt of 10 cents. Address C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., Chicago. (5th day.) FRIDAY, APRIL sth, 1874. Messrs. Bissett & Co., 25 Nattan St., Chicago, III. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the 3d instant, and note con- tents. We sent the seventeen cases of goods to the Indianapolis parties as directed, and forwarded them also the bill of lading. They have undoubtedly received them before this. Mr. A. R. Johnson, Memphis > Ind. DEAR SIR: We have your favor of the 4th instant, ordering shade rollers, and have shipped same to-day. We cannot send with them the full assortment of brackets named, as some of the sizes are out of stock, but we will have them in a few days, and will forward them to you then. Yours truly.' (6th day.) SATURDAY, APRIL 6th, 1875. Messrs. Hanford 6 Sons, Limited, Warerly, Iowa. GENTLEMEN: Your favor of f'.e 5th instant, and also sample brush at hand. The brush apparently is well made, and we shall be pleased to try same. While your price is above what we are paying, yet it is possible the goods are a little better. If we so conclude, we may at an early date try a sample gross of your goods.. Martin H. Green, Esq., Garnett, Kas. DEAR SIR: Your note for $100, due March 26th, has been sent to the First National Bank for collection, and returned endorsed, " No funds." We regret this very much as we need the money, and shall be pleased to have some explanation of the reason you have in not paying this note. We shall expect remittance by return mail. Respectfully. (7th day.) MONDAY, MAY roth, 1876. Messrs. Planchett 6 Nephew, 4221 z^th St., Louisville, Ky. GENTLEMEN: We have received your letter in which you state that hereafter all of our bills will be post-dated sixty days. We were not in- formed of this fact by our buyer until yesterday, after we had sent you settlement. We are obliged to you for calling our attention to this fact, and here- after shall make our settlements accordingly. The Farwell-P arsons Co., P. O. Drawer 391, New Orleans, La. GENTLEMEN: Answering your favor of the pth instant, we beg to reassert that the goods sent us were not up to the standard, and we cannot use them. We do not wish a discount on price, for the goods are not what we want. We want the goods we ordered and none others. As you gave us no instruction what to do with these, we have returned them by freight yesterday. Very truly. BELIEF FOR THE WEARY TYPEWRITER. After many years of experiment and appreciation of the defects of all previous writing machines there has been at last placed upon the market one which is free from every objection applicable to other machines; one which it is a pleasure to operate; which does the best of work; which has a touch, the ease and softness of which is unapproachable and therefore the speed unlimited; such machine being the SMITH PREMIER, the monarch of all typewriting instruments at the present day, and destined to be the standard of the future as it is to-day the best in the market. The history of the SMITH PREMIER TYPEWRITER, while a brief one, has been replete with successes from the day it was first introduced. The best testimony that can be given in favor of any typewriting machine is that which has practically no interest in the success of any particular ma- chine and which emanates from those who have never practiced upon any. Lest this last claim be disputed, let us state that the person who by years of practice has become very familiar with the touch and the plan of using a certain machine grows so accustomed to it that it is apt to blind his or her eyes to the advantage of another machine, just as persons who having for years held their pen in a cramped position cannot see the benefit of the plan taught by the best teachers of penmanship. There seems to be a growth of the hand to certain ways of doing certain things, and as it is diffi- cult for a penman using the cramped style of holding the pen to change to the easy flowing style, so it is difficult for a person familiar with an ancient typewriter to always see the advantages of a new one, but place a number of students, who are unfamiliar with any machine, at work upon a number of different kinds, allowing them to try them all and adopt that which they may naturally be led to prefer, and in such a test the machine which the majority will select will assuredly be the most convenient, easiest operated, and which does the most perfect work, because beginners, if of mature age, with their vision not accustomed to looking at bad typewriting, will criticize more thoroughly than one who has become blind to the defects of poor typewriting, therefore beginners will pick out naturally the machine which does the best work and is the easiest to operate, the most convenient to adjust, in fact the one which in every way would be the best. Their judg- ment would be unprejudiced, since in the majority of cases they would not know which machine would do them the most good. In such tests a& these made in business colleges, notably the Underhill College at Rochester, N. Y., the Bryant & Stratton College, at Buffalo, and other institutions throughout the country, where the students have had an opportunity to use the other machines if they desired to, they have invariably preferred the SMITH PREMIER TYPEWRITER, both for the kind of work, ease of touch and other particulars mentioned, and when we add to these evidences the fact that even experts on other machines have, after investigation, stated their belief that the SMITH PREMIER was far in advance of any other on the market and twenty years ahead of its time, we must naturally conclude that this com- bined evidence means a great deal. It is a fact that the people who are buying new machines are buying more SMITH PREMIER TYPEWRITERS than any other in the market, because, as compared with all others, it is just what its name implies the PREMIER the best in every way. Copyright 1891, by Curtis Haven. ooi-.i-.EOTionsr INTO. i. OF HAVEN'S SELECTED LISTS OF ACTUAL BUSINESS LKXTKRS. Containing all the Ordinary Words, Terms and Phrases Occurring in Actual Busi- ness, Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting Practice, with Words Counted and Numbered for Timing Speed. 1OO Letters Price 10 Cents. ^EXPLANATION. Every twenty-five words are marked (25), (50) or (75) and every hundred words are shown by black figures, (1), (2), (3) etc., representing 10.0, 200, 300, etc., respectively. Such figures are not to be read as part of the letters.] 1. Dear Sir: We cannot be guided by what those houses maybe willing to do, as it was our option to have you ship the (25) goods to whoever we desired, and as said once before, we wrote you that we would prefer you to turn them over to someone else. (50) We have done the very best we could for you and. really see no occasion for any reduction, or any ill feeling on your part. (75) 2. Gentlemen: We still feel that it would benefit your goods to put them on the rebate plan in Canada. We have spoken to two or (1) three dealers, and find their views coincide with ours on this point. Our idea is if you proposed it, all would at once cordially fall [25] in line. Messrs. H. M. Sweitzer& Co. have not had the slight- est hitch, since they began it, that we have heard of, and we [50] sell large lots of goods with perfect satisfaction, and no trouble as to prices. 3. Gents: We are in receipt of a bill Oct. pth, for (75) goods amounting to $30.00. We are informed that these goods were ordered by the Wright Mercantile Co. of your agent here and there is (2) no excuse whatever for your charging them to us. The Wright Mercantile Co. is a sub-let department in our store and is entirely re- sponsible for (25) goods sold to them, but it is of course a great deal of trouble and confusion to have our accounts mixed up with theirs and (50) we will not permit it under any circumstances. Very respectfully, 4. Gents: Enclosed herewith we send you the bill of cloaks delivered to your de- partment in (75) our store and charged to W. P.& Co. We do not see what necessity there is for doing any thing of this kind, and, (3) on the other hand, it causes con- fusion in our office. We have nothing to do with this maker and we trust you will omit sending (25) us bills of this sort hereafter or charging goods belonging to your department in the store, or buying goods in our name to be delivered (50) to your department. Respectfully, 5. Dear Sir: We have your favor of the tenth inst., referring to an order given vou for business cards of our (75) company, by a man purporting to be our agent under the real or assumed name of Cook, on receipt of which we wired you his (4) description and have just a reply. We are unable to identify the man from the de- scription you have kindly given, but from his youth we (25) would judge him to be a new adventurer in the field, who is getting up his stationery and making other pre- parations to become a professional (50) swindler under the guise of a traveling man We hope soon to be advised of his detection and arrest. Yours very truly, 6. Dear Sir : In [75] order for us to check up the articles you wrote and which are unpaid for, we must receive from you a list of the titles [5] of the articles in question. Please furnish us with same promptly and oblige. 7. Dear Sir: We certainly must request you to send at once for (25) the note returned to you. Money is very tight now and we must make collections. Please attend to this at once and oblige. 8. Dear Sir: (50) I send you by return mail a catalogue. The only young stla- lion I have for sale is Coxwain: he is verv speed-promising and will (75) probably be about 2:15 to 2/4. He is compact and sinew v, of good form and most excellent quality, bui't and gaited just [6] like his sister, Fanette, and doubtless will be . as she is. She was only in four races last season, getting a record of (25) 2: three-year-old, an authentic trial of 2:25, and will lower her record this vear if nothing happens. (50) I will sell him for $500. Yours, 9. Dear Sir: We beg to call special attention to our department for the distri- bution of all (75) kinds of advertising matter, such as circulars, pamphlets, cards calendars, samples of merchandise, etc. The dissatisfactory manner in which a great deal of this work [7] has been done in the city has prevented many firms from go- ing into this branch of advertising, so we have devised a system of shadowir. [ with the employment of a better class of men than is usual, which will, we think, give satisfaction to our patrons and ourselves. If vou (50) are in want of anv distri- bution and will drop us a line, we will at once call upon vou and give vou anv par- ticulars you (75) may desire. 10. Gentlemen: We enclose, with thanks, receipt for $786, (seven hundred and eighty-six dollars) received in yours of the iSth. Did you intend that [8] this amount should balance particular bills? Please let us know, and oblige. Yours truly, 11. Dear Sir: We must kno\v what you are going to do (25) about the Wallace contract. We shall certainly place the note in an attorney's hands if not settled at once. Yours truly, 12. Gentlemen: Terms on vour (50) invoice of Oct. 30, are not correct. Thev should be as of Dec. 3ist, 7 per cent, off 30, 90 days dating. Please correc' Yours truly, 13. Gentlemen: The Railroad Co. notified us yesterday that the goods for B. M. Smith & Bro. arrived yesterdav. The cars went forward on (9) Sept. 6. so the goods have arrived too late. What do you wish us to do with them? Please instruct by return mail. Yours truly, (25) 14. Gentlemen: In replv to your favor of the i5th, the information given vou bv our Mr. Land is all the information we have. Mr. Silberman (501 promised him to settle at fortv cents, and to do so immediatelv, after Mr. Land's visit upon him. lie has failed to make good his (1$) word, so that is all we can say about it. Yours trulv, 15. Dear Sir: in order to give our customers who are interested in the (1O) paint trade an opportunity to learn what others have done with these goods, we invite druggists who deal in paints to write us short letters (25) on their experience in handling paints and varnishes. Each letter must be headed "Experience in Paints." It must not be over one column of our [50] paper in length, and must reach us before March 1st next. For the best letter giving points on this trade we will pav the writer (75) ten dollars ($10.00) in cash. Let us hear from everv one who handles these goods. We want good common sense points on how to make this (11) branch of the business profitable to the druggist. Do not forget to mention the undesirable features. 16. Dear Sir: We wrote to you 24th inst. (25) for your payment due July i9th. Please let us have the amount. 17. Dear Sir: What about your note dated November 21, iSSS, (50) for $79.80 due April i, 1889? Please let us have remittance. 18. Dear Sir: We are in receipt of a. (75) postal-card from Mr. C. informing us that Mr. F. has sold all the boxes in which the pianos were sent to him. Can you (12) account for this? It strikes us very strangely that a man who pretends to know anything about business should sell what does not belong to (25) him. We have directed Mr. C. to get boxes, and to compel Mr. F. to pay all expenses. Do you know anything about this? Please (50) let us know. Awaiting reply, we remain. Yours truly, 19. Dear Sir : You will oblige us very much by remitting balance of Spring account. Respectfully yours, (75) 20. Dear Sir: The disturbing element which contributed more than anv thing else towards the temporary suspension of business by the Swan Down Bed Quilt Co. (13) has been removed, and there is now no reason why the company should not resume business and make money. I am sending this letter to (25) the stockholders in order to call a meeting for Saturday afternoon, August n, at the office of the company, at 2:30 p.m. sharp, (50) to ascertain their wishes in regard to the advis- ability of continuing. Your attendance at such meeting is greatly to be desired, and if you cannot (75) come in person, please either send a power of attorney in my name for me to act for you, or give it to some other (14) stockholder who is to come, that he may vote according to your wishes. If neither can be done please drop us a written expression (25) of your opinion of the course for the company to take, with any suggestions you may have to make, so that the letter may be (50) read to those present and they may be better able to act advisedlv The prospects are good for the coming season. Very truly yours, 21. Dear [75] Sir: Your note for $402.57 (four hundred and two dollars and fifty- seven cents) was due yesterday. You are no doubt aware from the reports in (15) the papers how very tight the money market is at present, and we really would con- sider it a great favor if you send draft for (25) the above amount. Yours very truly, 22. Gentlemen: We have yours of the first, with draft for $34.41 (thirty-four dol- lars and forty-one cents), which has (50) been placed to your credit. We enclose statement of your account, showing a balance of $7.44 (seven dollars and fortv-four cents). As your remittance does (75) not balance account as you stated, no doubt you have made an error. Yours trulv, 23. Dear Sir: As counsel for the James White Oil Trust, (16) we have been instructed by the trustees to make the following report to your committee. They have examined the affairs of the organization and find (25) that the annual report contains a correct statement of its affairs up to August the first, 1889, the close of the fiscal year. (50). In the conduct of the business it has been the custom of the executive officers to utilize the Centennial Oil Co., N. Y., as a (75) finance company through the medium of which they have been enabled to facilitate their financial arrangements. The President and Treasurer of the Trust for the (17) purpose and with the intent as they state of maintaining and strengthening its credit have deemed it necessary or desirable to support the price of (25; the certificates in the market by conducting certain Trust certificate account in the name and for the account of the Centennial Oil Co. and without (50) the knowledge of the Trustees of the Trust or the company. These accounts are now closed with a loss to the com- pany of five millions (75) dollars. Messrs. Felton and Morrison who alone as officers inauugrated and managed these accounts have appeared before the trustees with their repective counsel and while (18) disclaiming legal responsibility in the matter have frankly expressed a desire to make a substantial contribution towards the same aggregating the sum of two million (25) dollars of which amount Mr Felton will contribute one hundred and fifty thousand and Mr. Morrison the balance. The trustees recommend that the matter be (50) adjusted on that basis. Respectfully, 24. Dear Sir: In reply to your favor of Dec. ist., we enclose you checks charged to your account Aug. xoth (75) and i6th and July 2nd., the only ones for the amount mentioned in your letter. After you have found out just what you want in (19) re- gard to them please return the same to us. 25. Dear Sir: Having received notice that through rates on oil from points wes*- of Chicago, exclusive (25) of Pacific Coast points, heretofore in existence exclusively are to be withdrawn Oct. loth from Findlay and Lima districts and Oct. 21 from Cleve- land and (50) the eastern points, we the undersigned refiners, hereby protest against the withdrawal of these through rates as being in the interest of another large shipper (75)and in direct violation of section third of the inter state commerce law. As we un- derstand that through rates on all other commodities still remain (20) in force, we feel confident that the withdrawal of the through rates on oil is in the interest of another large refining company, and give (25) you notice that we shall hold your road respon- sible for any damage resulting therefrom. We trust that you will see that this is unlawful and (50) hope the matter will be favorably considered by your freight association. 26. Dear Sir: We are in receipt of an order for you through Mr. Swartz. [71;] As the Commercial Agency docs not give you a favorable report, we could only ship the goods on the condition that you send us Chicago (21) Exchange for $21.09 (twenty-one dollars and nine cents) the net amount of the bill. Would ship promptly on receipt of your draft. Yours truly, 27. Gentlemen: (25) We have your letter of the i6th and note contents. Yester- day we sent you remittance for several of your bills deducting sixty days interest at (50) six per cent per annum. If not satisfied please return your check and we will remit at the maturity of the bills. Respectfully yours, 28. Gentlemen: (75) We have your statement of our purchase of Aug. 28th with the request that we remit. It is not necessary to send us such statements [22] for the reason that an invariable rule of this house requires all bills to be settled each Monday for all goods received during the previous [25] week. Your goods were not received until last week and were accordingly remitted for on Monday of this week. Had they been received the previous [50] week we should have sent remittance a week ago last Monday. Respectfully yours, 29. Gentlemen: If you wish to buy a full car of goods we [75] will allow you ten per cent, discount for spot cash in ten days. This is the very best we can do as materials have advanced. [23] 30. Dear Sir: When we made our contract with you to advertise in the Herald it was upon your guarantee that the price-2o cents per (25) line-was the lowest price that any one had with the Herald, excepting where contract had previously been made and which had not expired. We (50) have before us a bill rendered bv you, at 15 cents a line for advertising on Sunday, Sept. 29th, for a house that has [75] no contract with you that does but little or no advertising with you. Unless vou can explain this matter to our satisfaction, we shall consider (24) our contract as cancelled. Yours respectfullv, 31. Friend Louie: Pardon me for not writing you, but I am sobusv now that I do not get (25) any time for myself. We will be very busy until about" November ist, when trade slacks up. Hoping yourself and familv are well, with kind 150) regards, I remain, Yours truly, 32. Dear Sir: Kindly advise the telephone company that you have no telephone in your office. You appear in the book (75) as 4734, and people grow indignant and use unparliamentary language when they find they have been misled in their belief that- you (25) were at the end of a wire. 33. Dear Sir: Your letter of the tenth inst. to hand and contents noted. In reply we would state (25) that at present we have not the goods that you desire, in stock, and do not expect to have them for at least a week (50) or ten davs. Should vou then desire to have us fill you an order, we will do so promptly, and give our special attention to (75) seeing that you may receive goods in first class condition. Hoping to hear from vou in the near future, we remain, 34. Dear Sirs: I have (26) to acknowledge with thanks the receipt of your further order for my enamel to the value of five thousand pounds sterling, which shall" he delivered (25) in due course. I am pleased to note that this last order brings up the value of enamel ordered by you within the past few (50) months to 10,000 (ten thousand pounds) sterling. With regard to the advanced price you are paying me, I assure you that it is impossible, in view (75) of the verr great increase in the price of materials, to continue at the old rates. Yours faithfully, 35. Dear Sir: Your favor of the I5th (27) inst. received. Thanks for sug- gestion regarding safe. In reference to the newspaper scheme I think I fully un- derstand your proposition, but if you will let (25) me have a copy of the prospectus, explaining the advantages .of subscribing, etc., I will give the subject careful con- sideration and write you later as (50) to what conclusion I may arrive at. The socie- ties in this town are few and far between, likewise throughout the state; neverthe- less I will consider (75) the matter further as above stated. Do you know of any one who has a tvpewriter in fair condition which they would like to dispose (28) of at a reasonable figure? With kind regards, I remain, Your Sincere Friend. 36. Dear Friend: Enclosed please find 20 cents in stamps, which is the (25) amount clue you on books, which I got the other day. I forgot all about it yesterday when you were here, althougn the book which (50) I gave you should have reminded me. However, it is not too late now, so send you stamps. Hoping this will be sat : isfactory, I am, (75) Respectfully, 37. Dear Sir: Herewith please find $200, which please credit upon my account, and next week or week after next when I am (29) down I will pay the balance. 38. Dear Sir: I have heard nothing from you since last spring when you were changing your location. The last [25] of April I went to Denver and began service with the silver mining company, of which my brother is Secretary. The middle of July I [50] started on an Eastern trip, going to Chautauqua where I was for about a month thence to New York and Brooklyn for two weeks, and [75] I have now been here a week and expect to stay that much longer. Shall soon go back to Denver. Have been wondering how you [3O] have been getting along in your work. It seems to me that you have had a great deal to discourage you, but your sanguine temperament [25] and your pluck seem to pull you through. I hope your health is as good as these characteristic qualities you possess. I have a friend [50] in New York city who desires the agency for your books. Please let me know if he should buy your books here or of you. (75) Yours very truly, 39. Dear Sir: Your favor to hand. We enclose settlement of account. The price of the No. o beds at Sheboygan is one [31] dollar and fifteen cents each. 40. Dear Sir: Yours to hand and contents carefully noted. I think the plan you suggest a very good one, and [25] herewith return the matter to you with instruc- tions to arrange the circular as you think best. I also enclose you check with which to pay [50] the printer. Thanking you for your promptness, I am, Very respectfully yours, 41. Dear Sir: Regarding your inquiry in reference to pig lead, we beg to [75] say that although trade at the several lead centers has been quiet and dull, yet a strong undertone has been visible, and while apathy on [32] part of consumers is noticeable we attribute same more to extreme conservatism than any other cause. The present position of lead really warrants no bear [25] attitude, for as we have already outlined in our late circulars, consumption has been really more than production, and instead of piling up lead as [50] in past years we have drawn on our surplus to a very large extent. It is generally admitted that our American refiners outside the trust, (75) with possibly an exception, have decreased their product rather than in- creased, and this with large Mexican imports prior to July ist. Respectfully, 42. Dear Sir: Herewith (33) I beg to hand you two duplicate invoices asked for as follows : Jno. Clark, dated Feb. loth, $5.00, and Fred Neal, dated Jan. 3oth, (25) for $20.00; and would advise that original invoices were passed as follows: Jno. Clark, invoice passed Jan. loth leaving my No. 21; Fred (50) Neal invoice passed Jan. loth leaving my audit No. 16, 283. If these do not agree with your record please oblige. Very (75) respectfully, 43. Dear Sir: Business at Chicago has been quiet with but few sales. At St. Louis the market has ruled at 3.65 cents (34) to 3^ cents asked, and sales of several hundred tons are reported at these figures. The number of consumers here outside the trust (25) is so small that the amount of metal sold is very limited; it seems as if the "Future Great" had lost their supremacy. 44. Dear Si'.-: (50) In accordance with a price list of yours in which you quote spe- cial prices of fifty cents for type-writer ribbons, I herewith enclose that (75) amount for a black record ribbon, which please send me at your earliest convenience, and oblige. Very resp'y. 45. Gentlemen: Enclosed find our cartage rates on (35) delivered merchandise. Single articles of merchandise, when not included in a general bill, in bbls. and cases, are 20 cents each. In ordinary boxes not (25) exceeding 100 Ibs., ic cents each. All accounts are due and payable on the first of the month following purchase, and if not paid on (50) or before the tenth of the month, interest will be charged at the rate of 8 per cent, per annum from the date the account (75) became due. 46. Dear Sir: Answering yours of the 2nd inst. at the present writing there is every prospect of a large portion of Mexican ores (36) going abroad, and that the London market is being prepared for such a move is evidenced by the recent large advances-to which we shall [25] refer later on. There is no question but that present prices are affecting production, and were it not for the increase in value of silver (50) many more large producers would be closed down than we have record of. The " Corroders' Combine" has been the damper on pig lead, for with (75) the old regime removed, no one has turned up to buy lead and bolster the market, although the opportunities have been many, for at no (37) time have the trust controlled enough surplus pig lead to remain out of the market for any length of time. The present price of pig (25 )lead is cheap and buyers would do well to keep their weather eve open for early advances next year. Respectfully, 47. Dear Sir: We enclose letter (50) received to-day, and cannot see how vou came to sell goods on those terms to such a small dealer. We lose money by it. We [75] do not like to have a salesman make certain terms with a customer, and then write to us entirely differently. Please answer this and return [38] letter to us. Yours truly. 48. Dear Sir: Yours of the 26th received. Please accept thanks for chart in- closed. I would still like some further information (25) on the matter. How many pages of finger indication does your complete manual contain? I do not care fo any other feature of the book (50) especially, the main consideration being to get the largest possible finger indication. Does your complete manual contain any more finger indications than the chart? Hoping (75) you will pardon me for again troub- ling you with this matter and awaiting your early reply, I am yours, 49. Dear Sir : I desire to get (39) a number of copies of your books for our school I saw one some weeks ago and as near as I can remember, I think [25] it was a t\vo dollar book. It was a large black board-covered volume, and had several designs in it, one in particular was a (50) bottle. If you still have this work for sale, you may inform me at your earliest convenience, and I will remit the money, possibly for (75) fifty copies. Awaiting an early reply, I am, Yours, etc., 50. Dear Sir: We enclose invoices for style 2109 recently ordered. We also enclose [40] a letter from your territory and hope you will succeed in selling to the party. I have been expecting to hear from you with some [25] piano orders, and hope vou will report some at an early date. 51. Dear Sir: Although believing that every one will immediately recognize his own interests (50) and rigidly maintain the prices quoted by the crushers, it is still important to advise, that upon the strict maintenance by all jobbers of the (75) schedule named depends its continuance and further possible benefits. Our com- mittee therefore urgently request your close observance of prices and conditions named, as they have (41) assured the manufacturers that such will be the case. The enclosed are prioss agreed upon. 52. Dear Sir : I received the enclosed postal-card from you [25] this morning but do not understand it. Will you tell me which two dollar book you mean or whether you want our two dollar newspaper? (50) We send you our circulars in to-day's mail a.r t d will fill your order as soon as we know which publication you refer to. 53. Dear Sir =[75] Replying to your postal-card of Dec. 23rd, regarding 3337 shipment which you say you forwarded about two weeks ago, will [42] state that we would like to have you inform us as to the exact date. The receipt from the express office will tell you. Respectfully [25] _54. Gentlemen: I have not received last issue of your paper, and hence have not been able to check the insertion of my advertisement. Please send [50] copy of last issue to me and hereafter mail them to me each week. It is very difficult to procure them here, as the news [75] dealers do not sell single copies. Very respectfully, ^5. Dear Sir: The enclosed was received by me in to-day's mail, but as it does not indicate [43] the state from which it was sent, and as the post mark on the envelope is not legible, I am sending this to you on [25] a risk to- find out whether the person sending this to me resides in your town. I enclose stamp for reply. Very respectfullv, 56. Dear Sir: [50] The enclosed letter I received from you to-day, accompanied by fiftv two-cent stamps. You have, however, evidently mistaken some other advertise- ment for mine, as [75] we do not receive stamps in payment for any of our publica- tions and so state in all our advertisements. I therefore return forty-nine of [441 the two-cent stamps, using one as postage on this letter. Yours very respectfully, 57. Dear Sir: I enclose herewith drawings of an invention of mine [25] which I desire to put in the hands of a capable machinist for manufacturing. Please advise me what you would charge per gross for manufacturing [50] these, same size as drawings, though not so heavy. In fact, they should be as light as possible, and the middle rod should be of [75] wood, light ash or some other wood. The rest to be of steel. You might estimate for me by the dozen, by the gross, and [45] by the great gross. An early reply will greatly oblige. Very respectfullv, 58. DeorSir: We hand you sample of material from which we are making [25], carriers' uniforms at the exceedingly low price of seventeen dollars. Considering the material and workmanship, the price is very low, and we are only enabled [50] to offer this price owing to the large numbers we are making. We would be pleased to have you communicate this to your men and [75] any orders from you or them will have our best attention. Very truly, 59. Dear Sir : Your favor to hand. We are very sorry that the [46] glass was broken in shipment, but you are aware that we are not responsible for this damage. We cannot collect at this end, so you [25] will have to send in your bill to the company. As we have no claim on them, please send draft for amount due. It takes [50] along time to collect a bill from a Railroad Co. They are not as prompt in paying as they are in collecting. Yours truly, [75] 60. Gentlemen: Inclosed herewith you will find our check for four dollars and sixtv-four cents, being extra discount charged by us on your bill of (47) August 2oth for $116.00. Excuse our error in this matter. We did not observe that it was a net bill. Respectfully yours. 61 . Gents : [25]Please ship us drip pans as before, duplicating our last order if possi- ble. If you cannot ship the entire line of sizes please aavise us (50) at once, as the v are important sizes to us and it is necessary that we have them. Yours truly, 62. Gentlemen: We have your notice of [75] package lying in your office at Janes- ville, Wis., addressed to Mrs. Jane Follefson. Please hold same a few days longer. We have notified the lady [48] to call for them. We have also from you the en- closed notice of goods shipped to M. S. Neven, Janesville, which is refused. Please return [25] same to us and oblige. Yours, 63. Dear Friend: I enclose herewith what you asked for, and beg that you will forgive the apparent remissness in [50] not sending same before, which you must charge up to the fact that I have been down to Old Point Comfort, spending a week with [75 J Mr. Garrett. Hoping that you are quite yourself again. Very truly yours, 64. Gentlemen: Kindlv inform us when you load cars for Helena, Mont. Also when [49] you load for Springfield, Mo., and oblige. Yours truly, 65. Dear Sir: Your invoice 985 at hand to-day, we notice has been considerably (25) blurred when making press copy. We have had great trouble lately in decipher- . ing these invoices, and will be obliged if you will see that we [50] have distinct copies hereafter. 66. Dear Sir: We are in receipt of your favor of loth inst., enclosing check for $1000, which amount we [75] have placed to credit of your account for settlement of bills of loth ultimo. Please accept thanks. 67. Dear Sir: We are to-day in receipt of [50] a copy of the Petroleum News and note that you have an entire column advertisement for this house. We cannot understand it at all, as [25] we have given no order for anything of the kind, and would therefore like to know on whose authority it is inserted. Of course if [50] it is gratis, we are very much obliged. Yours very truly, 68. Gentlemen: Herewith we enclose a special discount card for your private use, and trust [75] you will see fit to avail yourself of the advantages offered. If you have any friends who might like one of these cards please have [51] them call. 69. Dear Sir: Our traveling agent, Mr. Briton, will be in your town in a day or two and we have therefore forwarded him [25] your favor of the nth with instruc- tions to treat -\\ith you on the very best terms possible. 70. Dear Sir: We never deviate under any circumstances [50] from our published advertising rates. Not a line ever went into our columns for a penny less than our established rates; further correspondence on this [75] subject will therefore be use- less. If you desire us to insert your nine inch advertisement for one year please send us definite order to that [52] effect, price to be paid as before stated. Yours re- spectfully, 71. Dear Sir: There must be a miscarriage somewhere, as our shipper positively states he sent [25] you the goods ordered and the shipping receipt reads for three packages. Inquire again at vour end and we will notify the express company here. [50] J2. Dear Sir: .v e have your letter soliciting advertising, but beg to say that we have concluded all our contracts for this year or would be [75] glad to try your paper. We thank you for the very liberal offer made us, and shall keep it in mind for next year. Respectfully, [53] 73. Dear Sir: You have done very well in your management of our branch at your town and we are glad to see that it is [25] now on a paying basis. You should be sure in making your final settlement with W. E. H. and the others to get receipt in [50] full for all past notes and due bills as well as all previous indebtedness, as several due bills and notes are missing. 74. Dear Sir: In [75] sending you catalogue asked for we believe you will find more unique items especially suitable for gifts in our list than that of any other [54] house. The quality of our Birthday, Anniversary and Holiday souveniers are superfine and the prices are very reasonable. 75. Gentlemen: As we haye four general stores [25] up in the woods, please send your illustrated catalogue to each mentioned, viz.: Mattoon, Waukegan, Alliance and Botney. Please give this your immediate attention. 76. Dear [50] Sir: Your proposition of the 4th inst. is satisfactorv, but before accepting same prefer to look somewhat more particularlv into mv finances. I will decide [75] within ten days positively, and would like you" to keep" offer open until that date and oblige. 77. Dear Sir: We would be glad to favor [55] vou with the address of a house in this citv manufacturing the churns vou desire, if we knew of one, but on investigation of the [25] directory and enquiries made we fail to discover any nearer than New York, where you have been getting them. 78 Dear Sir: Your polite note of (50) the i5tn inst. is received. I do not feel at liberty, however, to take advantage of your offer at this writing. 79. Dear Sir: Within the [75] last half hour one of our clerks bought five cakes of toilet soap and three cakes of laundry toap for twenty-five cents from a [56] manu- facturer's own wagon. In addition to this there is a scheme on the wrappers for the sending of a certain number of the wrappers to [25] the house that is behind the scheme, and you will get a certain article free of charge. This scheme is worked by one of the [50] largest, oldest, most respectable , and high-toned soap houses in the land-a house which uses magazines and papers for advertising- its soap to a (75) very large extent. As this is the first time it has come to our notice that they are peddlers, thev have evidently adopted the scheme [57] with the New Year. 80. Madam: Enclosed you will find amount of 85 cents received this a. in. We regret to say that we have [25] nothing at all near the sample you sent us. Awaiting your future orders. We remain, !Si. Dear Sir: The rules governing the payment of bills of [50] our firm is as follows: i. We settle all bills on Tuesday of each week for goods received during the week immediately preceding, regardless (if [75] the time when such bills mature, j. We remit at the t'ime of settlement for all bills which by the terms of purchase should or [58] can be paid in 10 davs from date of bill, deducting the discount .al- lowed in case of payment in ten days. 3. We close all [25] other bills at time of settle- ment bv our note pavable at our bank in Chicago. 4. We make all remittances for goods purchased East of [;o] Ohio in New York exchange West of Ohio in checks on Chicago. All notes given for goods purchased East of Ohio will be made pay- able [75] at our bank in Chicago in New York exchange and all such notes will by their terms, mature two days prior to the maturity of [59] the bills for which thev are given. 5. All damaged goods and goods which do not conform to the order will be returned. 6. Invoices [25] in which goods are charged at prices in excess of amount specified in order for the same, unless accompanied by a credit bill for the [50] amount of the difference or a statement to the effect that the extra charge may be deducted from the bill on settlement of same, will [75] be returned for correction, and in all matters relating to the settlement of such invoices the goods will not be regarded as having been received [60] by us until the return of the corrected bill, Respect- fully, 82. Dear Sir: ^four favor of the i8th received and noted. Samples have not vet arrived, [25] but we hope to receive them in the next mail. Will -report promptly as soon as samples come to hand, and hope that we will [50] be able to offer you some inducement to ship to our market. Respectfully, 83. Dear Sir: We have your letter of yesterday in which you claim [75] that we took off % per cent more than we \vere entitled to for discount from your bill. The extra 1-2 of one per cent [61] is for thirty days interest. 84. Dear Sir: Please accept thanks for your remittance covering bill of June 6th. We have credited it on the enclosed [25] statement, which leaves a slight balance of $8.18. In reference to your footnote at the bottom of the receipted bill enclosed, we [50] beg to say that we think, when you examine our new price-list, you will find it such an improvement over all competitors, in the [75] way of close prices for correct goods, that you will be convinced of its advantages and like it. 85. Gentlemen: You have thus far delivered to [62] us only two styles of goods ordered. Our order was given early, and we have to have two sample pieces each in August and balance [25] of goods in September and October. We must insist on an immediate delivery of balance of goods. Yours truly, 86. - Dear Sir: We got all your [50] goods down to the car, and the car had already been filled up, so they were unable to take care of them and we had [75] to take them back to our warehouse, where we hold them subject to your order. We had the goods down just as you wanted them. [63] Please advise by return mail if we shall ship these goods by open freight. Yours truly, 87. Dear Sir: I am informed that a colonization party [25] is now being organized in Allen Co., to start for Dakota some time this month, and would suggest that you go there at once and [50] look into the matter. There is no good reason why we should not have this business for we are now in a position to make [75] them a good through rate. Hoping you will secure the party, advising me by wire as early as possible whether you have done so, I [64] am, Yours truly, 88. Dear Sir: Herewith find enclosed as follows: i. Bill of C. A. Martinwith your endorsement thereon, and their letter, all of (25) which explain themselves. Please return the bill. 2. Duplicate bill of the Joliet Cover Co., their letter to us and our statement to them with (so)check. Your bill says deduct freight. Their letter says that they never allow freight. Please adjust. Respectfully Yours, 89. Dear Sir: Referring again to your favor [75] of the 22nd ult., addressed to Mr. Carl, and to which your Mr. Pleasant replied in the absence of our manager, Mr. Watson, would say [65] that having submitted the same to our New York house, they reply, "Please have revised work submitted to us and we will consider the proposition [25] made". Yours very truly, 90. Dear Sir: Will you kindly advise the writer by postal-card enclosed if you have the knowledge as to the amount [50] of acreage in vour vicinitv sown to flax this spring? Is it more or less as compared to that planted last spring? Any infor- mation concerning [75] the present condition and prospects of the flax crop will be much appreciated by Yours respectfully, 91. Dear Friend: In accordance with your favor of to-day, [66] just received, I at once forwarded you a copv of book remitted for. Your checks, however, permit me to say, facetiously, are getting beautifully less [25] each time; that is, they used to be one-dollar-and-thirtv-seven cents per copy. The last and previous one was one dollar and (5o)thirty-three cents. Please do not allow them to get any .mer, or else we won't have enough profit to pay postage. Please also accept [75] this criticism in the friendly spirit in which it is intended, but, at the same time take the hint, and oblige. Your sincere friend, 92. Dear [67] Sir: I write to advise you that the price of pig hams is advancing so rapidly that it would be advisable for you to send [25] us rather a larger order than your usual weekly one, that we may make our orders to the curers sufficient- y large to accommodate you. Respectfully, [50] 93. Dear Madam : We sent your goods by express yesterday. The delay was caused by our being unable to get the kind of braid you desired [75] and we thought best to hold other goods until we could send all together. 94. Dear Sir: I have your letter of the 23rd and note (68) contents. If Mr. Somers reported to you that I declined to pay the bill rendered * the rates you charged he reported me cor/ectly. What [25] I stated to him was exactly what I said to you at each and all of my interviews with you that we repudiated the con- tract[5o] made between the Excelsior Light & Power Co. and Watkins & Co. after its attempted consignment to you and claim that you had no right [75] whatever to occupy the premises, and that we would do nothing to countenance any such action on your part, but, at the same time, we [69] are willing to treat with you and pay you for any services rendered in this matter whatever is fair and right. If you are disposed [25] to settle the bill upon this basis, all right. If not, take such course as to you seems best. Respectfully yours, 95. Dear Sir: The mackerel [50] you complain of are the finest Spanish, and are considered a great luxury by many people. They are not as fat as our American mackerel, [75] but they are precisely what you ordered, and we do not care to be placed at the expense of freight in taking them back. Respectfully, [70] 96. Dear Sir: Your letter of the 5th received and noted. We have not yet been advised of the arrival of the balance of the car (25) of flour to Petersburg, and we are unable to say whether it has been delivered or not, but presume it has not yet come to (50) hand, as our party promised to notify us immediately after its arrival. We wish you would hunt this matter up at once, as we have (75) two lots more which we would like to ship in a few days, but unless we have a more satisfactory arrange- ment we think we had (71) better send by steamer. Awaiting your reply, which we hope to have at an early date, we remain, Yours truly, 97. Dear Sir: The enclosed advertisement (25) we clip from a Chicago daily and therefore, take the liberty of presenting to you the claims of our paper as an advertising medium for [50] your line of goods. Kindly see the columns of our last issue. We will insert this advertisement for ten cents per line and are certain [75] that you will be profited thereby. May we not have this for a standing "till forbid" order on Saturdays at the above rates? Yours truly, [72] 98. Dear Sir: Do you intend draining water from Pottsville Water Co.'s pipes at Old Boston? Is there not danger of bursting from reaction on account [25] of pres- sure? Please answer by return mail and oblige, 99. Dear Sir: We have your letter of the 26th inst. enclosing receipts and state- ment which we [50] have carefully examined. There seems to be a complication of errors in this matter. In lieu of these receipts, please send us receipts for bills [75] of i6th andi7thof Sept. and an additional receipt for $130.79 to apply on unsettled bills. Resp'y, TOO. Gentlemen: 1 [73] have your letter of the igth and have carefully considered its contents. As I have stated in my last letter, Mr. Blank acted as my [25] legal and business adviser in this whole transaction, from the time of my first negotiations with Mr. Parker down to the close, and I must (50) refer you to him for the informa- tion you ask for. Respectfully, [7361 words.] J^-These 100 letters represent a supplement to Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, the only complete work on Typewriting. Price $2. OIF 1 JLCTTJ^-Ij OOTJIRT I A A A A W-OZR-IDS OIF 1 JLCTTJ^-Ij OOTJIRT 1U,UUU TIESTIIMIOIISnr \ An selected for Snorthand and Typewriting practice with Words Counted and Numbeed I Ml for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEX, Tribune Building, Chicago, Illinois, on recelptr of J. V V Copyright, 1891, by Curtis Haven. This includes entire contents. All rights reserved. THE MODERN REPORTER. A Progressive Monthly Magazine of Practical Short-Hand and Type-Writing for the Entire Profession, all Teachers and their Pupils, and the Home Student. OUR AIM: To present in each number, not merely current events, but particular information as new and beneficial to the most experienced expert as to the novice. SUBSCRIPTION PRICE, One dollar a year, in advance, postage free. Single copies 10 cents each. ADVERTISEMENTS of an unobjectionable character, inserted in display columns at Twenty Cents per narrow-column line each insertion, each inch of space length-wise of the column counting as twelve lines. Advertisements of greater space than half page not accepted; smaller ones preferred. NEWS ITEMS on BRIEF PAPERS, in reference to the art we represent, will be always gladly wel- comed from any member of the profession. COMMUNICATIONS, business or otherwise, should be addressed to CURTIS HAVEN, ROOM 17, TRIBUNE BUILDING, CHICAGO, ILL. TENTH YEAB.J. MflRRU 18Q1 j 10c A COPY .NUMBER 3. f MflKUfl, lOai, \jl A. YEAR OUR MOCK LETTERS. In this issue of the paper we give our readers the concluding eleven days of the set of "Mock Letters" which are used by Haven teachers in giving students who are through the theory the briefest legible short-hand forms for miscellaneous mercantile work. We are devoting this issue to this information almost exclusively, simply because there is a demand for it which can scarcely wait until it should be printed by the slow plan of one page a month as was first contemplated and illustrated in October and November numbers of THE MODERN REPORTER. Our next issue, however, will contain mostly legal work; that is, selections from the Mock Court Reader in use by Haven teachers. In later numbers of the paper, convention work and miscellaneous short-hand literature will be the main features. The best plan upon which to get the most good in the shortest time from these mock letters, is for students to have some one dictate to them only two letters at a time, the student at once comparing his or her short-hand writing with the printed short-hand, noting every deviation therefrom, respecting shading, slant or curva- ture of characters, size, position, phrasing, etc., and practicing at least twelve times the proper form for each deviation. After this has been done with all the charac- ters of one day's letters, the two letters of the next should be similarly taken from dictation, compared and practiced; and so on throughout the entire course. The letters contain the short-hand forms for each day of the week except Sun day, as well as the names of the months and all sorts of dates; all personal initials, the name of nearly every state and important city in the Union, every style of names of firms, and street or post office addresses, home or foreign. This list of mock letters therefore gives students more information in regard to correct short- hand outlines than the mere title or their appearance suggests, and, on this account, well repaying purchasers for the expenditure of the small sum at which they are urnished. Teachers of all systems will find them of great advantage in their school work. t..,^..j ~T~ S~ q A.. 5L.A~t.Ji A fT.....\-o S ^> /~3 C fv , - ^ v- v l ^-^- 2 3< * . V ^-s c ^ ^ k~ ./" I I ^ ^ r ^----^ vo (8th day.) TUESDAY, MAY nth, 1877. Messrs. Lewis Carson 6 Co., 89 Franklin St., St. Paul, Minn. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the loth instant returning our statement and check, and stating that your terms are strictly 7-10 or 6-30. i In reply we beg to say that we bought these goods of your agent here upon the following terms: "7-10,60 days dating." The extra i percent, is for the sixty days' interest. We therefore return the check herewith. Respectfully. Mr. Samuel Hanson, Saco, Me. DEAR SIR: On weighing the feed billed to us on your invoice of the 8th instant, we make it 4,125 Ibs., which is 25 Ibs. less than your invoice above referred to makes it. We do not know whose scales are correct, but hereafter, to save trouble, please have weigher's certificate attached to all the feed you supply us with, and greatly oblige. Respectfully. (9th day.) WEDNESDAY, JUNE iath, 1878. Mr. James Lane, Box 9403, Boston, Mass. DEAR SIR: Replying to your letter of the loth instant, we have looked through our books to find some record of the purchase to,which you refer, but find nothing of the kind. From this we presume it was a cash purchase, in which case, in accord- ance with our custom, the sales slip was inclosed with the goods, and it would be necessary for you to send us the slip to locate the purchase. Mr. William A. Hopkins, East Saginaw, Mich. DEAR SIR: I send you herewith a blank form of report, which I wish made out by you in full and sent to the superintendent's office daily. You will note the word "time" at the bottom of the page, and a place to mark the time when you send this to the superintendent's office. Also the time it is received there. This is done to insure prompt delivery. We have had several complaints of late of cars not getting around on time, and hope in this way to avoid it in future. (loth day.) THURSDAY, J\JNE i3th, 1879. Miss Dora Weir, 5918 Hanlon St., Baltimore, Md. DEAR Miss: In further reply to yours of the 3oth ultimo, in reference to the third installment, we have written to Mr. Evans, and he acknowledges that you paid him. The contract which we hold from you makes the installments payable at this office, and we do not want you to make any further payments to anyone outside of this office, as we will not be responsible for remittances made to other parties than ourselves. Hoping there will be no future misunderstanding, we are, Yours truly. .5...N m N . ..... ... V ....V..^ 4 The George J. Grimm Co., Glendale, Miss. GENTLEMEN: Replying to your favor of recent date, we beg to say that we do not object to signing the contract sent us, provided you will except the clause which states that: " We have not sold," etc., as we are free to admit that during the present year we have in numerous instances given our best discounts to parties buying in smaller quantities than one gross. Hence, it will, in this case, be necessary to apply the old adage, " Let bygones," etc. Very respectfully. (nth day.) FRIDAY, JULY i 4 th, 1880. Drs. Q. 6 E. Venner, 59 Paternoster Row, London, E. C., England. DEAR SIRS: I have sent you by to-day's mail an electrotype of the inclosed copy of advertisement, which please insert in your paper for one month as per your quotations of recent date, for which I inclose check. Please, by return mail, give me rates of one year's insertion of this cut, upon receipt of which, if satisfactory, I will send you contract for one year's insertion instead* of one month. Awaiting your reply, we are, Most faithfully yours. M. Zabrisky 6- Co., Dallas, N. C. GENTLEMEN: We have your note of the i3th inst. Our experience in sending out goods by express without prepayment has been unfortunate. In so many instances they are returned to us and we are compelled to pay express charges both ways that it makes the business as a whole unprofitable, and we have abandoned it. If goods are not as represented by us, we are always willing to exchange them and make them right, but we must insist on payment in advance, particularly where these goods are to be taken from a piece and the value of them very much diminished by doing so. Respectfully yours. (i2thday.) SATURDAY, JULY i5th, 1881. The Patent Ramrod Mfg. Co., Montgomery City, Mo. GENTLEMEN: Absence in Philadelphia has prevented an earlier reply to your favor of the first of May, received at Chicago a few days after I had started for Philadelphia. I shall be pleased to form the acquaintance of your manager when he arrives in Chicago, and to discuss arrangements and hear what you may have to say additional on the subject stated in my former letter. Whether I can make any arrangements in reference to your ramrod machinery or not, you are at liberty to use any portion of my letter as a testimonial that you may care to. Messrs. W. 6 V O. Tettler, Jacksonville, Ore. GENTLEMEN: Yours of the i3th inst. received and noted. We have made all entries to bring our ledger to conform to yours. In regard to the ] -^ ?. A. _ ; '>S.v. 1 ./-J...Y-. .XP. two accounts of Johnson & Co. and F. C. Duvall we are not quite clear. The Johnson & Co. error must have occurred in April, and was carried forward into next month's balance sheet. As it appears to be an error in posting, we yet fail to see how you could fetch the May balance. Please itemize these errors and the counter errors of 14 cents. Your early attention will oblige. (i 3 th day.) MONDAY, AUGUST 2oth, 1882. Mr. F. Cecil, Maysville, Grant Co., W. Va. DEAR SIR: I gave Haas & Co. an order to-day for linen as per inclosed list. You will also perceive I bought sheeting from them. We compared samples with those you sent, and thought their's the better. If you know of any lower prices at which any of these numbers have been sold, try and get ours just as low. Stir Bernard Ulman people up about our goods. We need everything ordered badly. Ship by express. Let me know Berner's price for plaid cottons, 29 to 30 inch widths. I buy here at 8. I want a case of one style they have if I can secure it. Messrs. P. Elverson 6* Nephew, Lock Box R, Montreal, Canada. GENTLEMEN: Acknowledging your favor of the i6th, which has just come to hand on account of its having been directed to Chattanooga, would say that we would be pleased to quote you on sash-weights in 5,000 or 10,000 pound lots at $19.50 per ton, F. O. B. here; in carload lots of 15,000 pounds, $19, F. O. B. here. We make a large variety of weights in sizes, and those with a handsome and perfect eye. We have sold quite a good many in your territory, and would be pleased to fill your orders for such a quantity as you may desire. Hoping to hear favorably from you at an early date, we remain, Respectfully. (i4thday.) TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER aist, 1883. C. Naylor, Esq., Box 49, Salt Lake City, Utah. DEAR SIR: Yours at hand. Early in the week values of pig lead here were weaker, and sales were made at 3.75. Latterly there is a firmer feeling; 3.80 is freely bid, with 3.85, 3.87^, 3.90 asked. The amount of lead offering is very small, and it would not surprise us to see higher values rather than lower. * Lead at London still continues strong, and since our last circular a rise of ;i per ton is recorded. There is no question now but what lead is in strong hands and \$ will be reached before a halt takes place. The general impression is that lead, with other metals, is good property. Messrs. L. Ulberman & Sons, Oil City, Penn. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter of the igth in which you state that you can not allow 8 per cent, discount, and ask us to remit what you call a balance of three dollars and nine cents ($3.09) on our bills of August i gth and 2ist, duplicates of which you have sent us. i.>. /...J _ \ ^/- 1 , v<\ A -r- U~ - v *Jt Xrt [ - 71 v ^ fj C7V \J P v_x^ ^ N n?t TA_ ) \/c. \ Ys L / ^ o -* S <^-J--v^J ^ t ...v.^? ..a.i_ L_ i^ k ^ x ^V \ ^ j ^ v -^j C \ C i ^" ""l t'-dlx "* The terms of the above bills are written thereon seven off, ten, sixty days dating. The extra i per cent, charges in your statement is for the sixty days' interest for prepayment. If you are not willing to allow interest at the rate of 6 per cent, per annum for prepayment of post dated bills, please advise us, and hereafter we will not remit until maturity of bill. (i5th day.) WEDNESDAY, OCTOBER 2 2 d, 1884. Mr. X. Idler, Hortonsville, Wis. DEAR SIR: I received a letter this morning inclosing a remittance with the above name signed and the town of Hortonsville, but no State named, and the envelope was marked so poorly by the postmaster, from whose office the letter was sent, that I could not get the State name from that source. I find, however, there is a town named Hortonsville in Wisconsin, and I therefore send to that town the article desired. If it should happen to reach you, please remember in the future not only to write your name plainly to every communication you send out, but be sure always to give your address in full, including State and county, especially when you send money. This precau- tion will save you and others considerable inconvenience. JV. Smith, -Esq., Fargo, Dak. DEAR SIR: The popularity of our Impervious Packages has induced others to offer for sale packages represented to be the same as ours. All Impervious Packages made by us are fully protected by U. S patents, of which we are sole owners, and are the only Wood Packages that can be so prepared as to be impervious to oil without infringing on our patents. In all cases of infringements, dealers, users, and manufacturers are alike liable under the law. Therefore, for your own protection, we respect- fully caution you against all Impervious Packages represented to be the same as ours; also against infringements on any of our patents. See that all Impervious Packages offered you are made by the Impervious Package Co., and bear their name. All others are imitations or infringe- ments. (i6th day.) THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 2 3 d, 1885. Messrs Z. I. Gypson & Co., Box S, Melbourne, Australia. GENTLEMEN: We have your letter dated November ipth acknowledging our remittance of $32.87 in settlement of bill of September 2d, signed " Z. I. Gypson & Co., per Snyder," and in Snyder's hand-writing the following : "Gentlemen: You took off more discount than we allow for extra dating. After this please take off at the rate of 6 per cent, per annum." The terms of payment endorsed upon the above bill are as follows: "7 off 10 after Nov. ist." This made the bill due Nov. nth. You had the money in your hands on the 2 3 d of September. Deduct Sept. 23 from Nov. n leaves 49 days. The face of the invoice is $35.63. Seven per cent, discount from $35.63 leaves $33.13^. The interest on $33. 13^ for 49 days at 6 per cent, per annum is a fraction over 25 cents. We remitted you $32.87. Respectfully. \ ^ ..J ........ . -*f s .....- J.. I ...d..J _ O i. ...... r ........ L^...r^A. - C .7.A .. . A Rev. D. E. Yorick, El Paso, Texas. DEAR SIR: Inclosed you will find a postal-card which I have received and sent circulars to. At the same time I wrote to the party giving your name as my Texas agent. It would probably be best for you to write to, or call upon him and see if you can obtain his order. He should at least have a set of your circulars. Have )'ou got the copy ready yet for the special circular you were think- ing of getting out? You may have it printed in your town, but be sure to send us a few copies of it, that we may keep track of what is being done in Texas, and place same on file. We think you are making a mistake in making special use of the No. o circular in preference to the No. 453, but as you are on the ground and get a better chance to feel the pulse of the business portion of your State than we do, we suppose you are in a position to know best. Let us have your weekly reports promptly, and oblige. :./.... $X "" C "V <\ f / i V >" I G/ y, ^ \ >^ ~ ^/ v..?c ...... v- :*** ^ / z v ...l... '"i %^ <^*~> I , - \ ^-v^ ^^-\ /T> * ^ -.>/ O^Jl v^r.*..r J A r -. ^ 'v\^ - r ^^ * ~^ s (:8th day.) SATURDAY, DECEMBER 3 ist, 1890. Mr. Y. Otterly, Jr., 9314 Broadway^ New York City. DEAR SIR: We have y-vir letter of the 28th and note contents. It would be a useless bother r* \ .rouble for us to keep a bank account in New York. If New York mercnaots would rather have checks on New York in payment of our bills, it would be much easier for us to send them the drafts of our bank here on New York for payment of their bills. We send our own check as a matter of convenience, and it is all nonsense for people in New York to claim that our checks on our bank here are not current in New York, or that they have to wait until payment of those checks before the amounts are passed to their credit. There has not been an hour since the firm of Jones, Doyle & Co. com- menced business that exchange on New York has not been from ten to fifty cents on the thousand dollars discount at our banks here in Chicago, and when the merchants with whom we deal tell you that a bank in New York will refuse to take a check from Chicago on deposit, which is worth from one-tenth to one-half per cent, premium in New York funds, it is simply absurd. When you take into consideration that every bill of this firm is settled every Monday morning, averaging less than four days from the time the goods are received, it ought to be a satisfactory method of dealing to the merchants in New York, and if not, we can manage to buy in Chicago. Mr. S. Quartermart, Montpelier, Vt. DEAR SIR : Your favor of the 26th instant at hand; also the news- paper. The article is partially correct. This company has increased its capital stock to $725,000, and bought out the Salt Lake City and San Fran- cisco owners of the mine. The writer's interest was merged into the present company, who now own and control the mine. The company is composed of St. Louis, Akron and Hamburg, Ger- many, stockholders. Up to the time of purchase, this company was simply the selling agent. Col. Conger, Thomas Welch, Judge Grant, and C. P. Cobbs are of the members of this company at Akron. We have no idea of forming a trust, but expect to run our business independently from any other similar concern. We have been doing considerable exporting, but expect to push it still more. Egyptian Asphaltum, here as well as abroad, has declined in conse- quence to six and one-half cents per pound, and in isolated cases, even a trifle lower. We have also made practical tests lately in the way of paving, which have, so far, in all cases proved a glorious success. The price of the mine is $111,000; the size of the fissure as stated is substantially correct. It is five and one-half feet wide, but tapers gently at both ends. It can be worked for eleven thousand feet, for it has been opened at that distance. The deposit is in a true fissure-vein, consequently it will prob- ably not be known in our life-time how deep it runs. So far the fissure is vertical, without any indications of the dip. Very truly. ^5 W p 1 s^ o o 9? p La \ !\ J \ J J J ^ J \ ^cV r ^ J J r \ ( U \ SOIMIE IPIEIR/TIItTIEJIsrT Showing the advantages possessed by Haven's distinct joined vowels over othe- systems in making legible, without decreasing speed, those words wherein vowels- must be written, etc., etc. GRAHAM. HAVEN. LINDSLEY. CROSS. Ape \ \ 1 ^ 7 Away ^ ^ InimidVant ^ y-U s^ B. PI THAN, I PITMAN:. HAVEN. Koo. -. j^-s P^x ^r Leave Love Will Have You will Have teen PITMAN. f\_ A* /TL. r\: ^s HAVEN. .... r^\ "IT x?^| /r~N r Copyright, 1892, by Curtis Haven. This includes entire contents. All rights reserved. THE MODERN REPORTER A Progressive Monthly Magazine of Practical Short-Hand and Type-Writing for the Entire Profession, all Teacher* and their Pupils, and the Home Student. ELEVENTH YEAR. i. MARCH 1892 J 10c A COPY. NUMBER 3. lYlHnUn, lOjZ. 1 $1.00 A YEAR. OUR POPULAR COURT READER. E of the most important facilities possessed by Haven Colleges, and which has aided so materially in the qualification of students for court reporting shortly after finishing their three months' course of in- struction at above institutions, has been the especially and carefully pre- pared Court Reader which the author compiled from cases in his own experience which he considered would best cover most all possible con- tingencies in court work, and include within its compass every important legal phrase used in such reporting. Heretofore the few copies of this reader permitted to be used were written with typewriter and pen by Mr. Haven personally, and their use limited to his teachers, but so widespread has grown the book's reputation and the request for duplicates, that the author, having copyrighted it, has concluded to place it within the reach of the public by publication in these pages, commencing on next page of this issue. The series of cases will be complete in six numbers of THE MODERN REPORTER this, and the issues of April, May, June, July and August. If bought separately, the price will be 10 cents per copy; where the six are pur- chased at one remittance, 53 cents; to those who, having this issue, desire only the other five, 45 cents for those five. Teachers of all systems will find this series of court cases of great advantage in their school work. HAVEN'S POPULAR COURT READER. z~...> ' i A L s- JOHN WILLIAMS vs. COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. DAILY NEWS CO. ) BEFORE JUDGE ALFRED MARSHALL. CASE No. 49. TRENTON, N. J., May 3, 1856. Ft>r the plaintiff appears Hon. J. L. Simons. For the defendant appear Messrs. Black and Strong. JOHN WILLIAMS, the plaintiff, sworn in his own behalf. DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Simons: Q. Mr. Williams, you are the plaintiff in this suit, are you not? A. I am. Q. What public position do you hold? A. I am Sheriff of this county. Q. The article which caused the present suit in what newspaper did it appear? A. In the Daily News, of this city, date of February -ioth. Q. Of what year? A. This year. To defendant's attorneys: Do you admit publication; or, shall I further prove it? Mr. Black: We admit publishing the article in question. To witness: Q. You know the defendants well, do you not? A. I do. Q. Have you had much intercourse with them, as a public officer? A. I have had up to the first of January of this year. Q. Of what did that intercourse consist? A. Giving to their paper the advertisements of the county sales of this county for publication. Q. When did you last authorize them to print such sales? A. Some time in December of last year. Q. Then you have given them no public printing on, nor since, the first of January, of this year? v A. No, sir. Q. Had you no advertisements to give? A. Yes, sir. I had quite a number since last December. Q. Why did you not give such advertisements this year, as well as last, to the Daily News? Objected to. Objection overruled. Exception for defendant. f^ j .r> p xi c-v.. ../ -A> VP / o/ ^ I "-M ^--H- L.fL.7 "^ f . 1 \S\ 9 <-^ ^ "* Ti ^i 1 v * " " o" v* ^1 *>^ g " > -^JS \- ^~ V WILLIAM JONES ) COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. vs. BEFORE JUDGE JAMES PARSONS. STATE INSURANCE ASS'N. ) CASE No. 506. CAMDEN, N. J., January 5, 1821. For the plaintiff appears Samuel R. Taylor, Esq. For the defendant appear Messrs. Walters and Harvey. WILLIAM JONES, the plaintiff, sworn. EXAMINATION-IN-CHIEF. By Mr. Taylor: Q. What is your name ? A. William Jones. Q. Are you the plaintiff in this suit ? A. Yes, sir. Q. Where do you reside ? A. Nineteenth and Federal streets, this city. Q. That is just beyond Cooper's Creek Bridge, is it not, Mr. Jones? A. Yes, sir, in the open country. Q. On what is known as the Moorestown pike ? A. Yes, sir. Q. Do you own property out there ? A. Yes, sir; a farm of about fifty acres. Q. On what side of the road is it, Mr. Jones ? A. On the right-hand side, coming out of Camden; that is, going east. Mr. Harvey: If it please the Court, I would like to make a preliminary request that no more time be wasted on this case than is necessary. General Wharton. the Vice-President of the State Insurance Association, here present, desires to leave the town as soon as possible on important business, to be transacted to-day, at the office of the Company, Newark, N. J., and desires me to say that the location of Mr. Jones' property is not a matter of defense with us, and it is furthermore admitted by us that the barn owned by Mr. Jones, and which was burned on the night of August 14, 1820, was located on his prop- erty, wherever that may be, and was the one insured by us under Policy No. 7501. We simply differ in regard to the valuation of the property de- stroyed, and hope questions will be confined to that fact. The Court: This being understood by the plaintiff, I have no doubt he will be glad to take advantage of this opportunity ot saving both himself and the Court valuable time. ^ / ....... A.. /...^ ? l ^ a . v i \ <="* ^ o- ..G ..C. -c ..:....7f?...!. v _ ^a v- -* ^^N - S ^?' TXv'... . k_^.. L/....^ 4...\ .^ .TVT .s> ^ V i "<\ \\-t0 v Vi 1-^ :;-< f/v**fe-V _ %}..-> .^..A r^:..j X ^ Qj) - rf-.N FRANKLIN B. MILLS) COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. vs. V BEFORE JUDGE WM. C. ALBRIGHT. JOHN B. HENRY. ) CASE No. 2506. PHILADELPHIA, Nov. 29, 1831. APPEARANCES: G. H. Lewis, Esq., for plaintiff. Henry Darcy, Esq., for defendant. FRANKLIN B. MILLS, the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Lewis: Q. What is your name in full, Mr. Mills? A. Franklin B. Mills. Q. Are you the plaintiff in this case? A. Yes, sir. Q. State your business, please? A. I am in the installment business. Q. That is, you sell goods on installments or periodic payments? A. Yes, sir. Q. All kinds of goods? A. Most all household goods. Q. Where is your place of business? A. Nine-hundred-and-five, and nine-hundred-ancl-seven Lincoln Ave. Q. Do you know the defendant, John B. Henry? A. I do. Q. Have you had business transactions with him? A. Yes, sir; several. Q. What sort? A. He has bought household goods of me on Hie installment plan. Q. Did he always pay for such purchases? A. Always, except on the last occasion. Q. When was that? A. January i4th, of last year, he bought a set of furniture of me for which he has not paid. Q. Has he made any payment on account? A. I sold him the set for sixty dollars, payable ten dollars down and two-dollars-and-fifty-cents per week until paid. He made the first pay- ment of ten dollars and his first weekly installment of two-dollars-and-fifty- cents, and since then he has paid me no more money. Q. Did Mr. Henry state any reason for discontinuing payments? A. He gave me a reason; but it is a reason which I consider none. y...V... .1. "T ....o_/ J.. ._ V A "5 , ~\\ .i. " ^ UNITED STATES ) U. S. DISTRICT COURT, FOR THE NORTH- vs. ERN DISTRICT OF ILLINOIS. MURPHY ET AL. ) BEFORE JUDGE BEE. [No JURY.] CASE No. 6754. CHICAGO, June 20, 1880. SECOND DAY MORNING SESSION. MR. KOST continuing his testimony of the afternoon before: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Sling: Q. I gave you numbers of cars yesterday can you tell me where the grain in those cars came from? A. The numbers are mixed up on my memorandum here. I have got six of them. Q. Shall I call the number of the car? A. I think the last three you called are on that slip there, from St. Joe elevator. The Court: Give us the numbers of those cars. Witness: 4399, 18263, ^646. Those are Pink Line cars from Continental ele- vator, billed October 26. If you will give me some of the other numbers, I can tell better. Mr. Sling: Q. What numbers have you there? A. 4399, 18263, i5 6 46. Mr. Wallace: Does he say those cars were inspected out of the Pink Line? Mr. Sling: Yes; will you give the dates? A. Inspected October 26. Q. Inspected October? A. Inspected out into Pink Line cars. Q. State respecting car number 35404. A. That was inspected October 27, from the Continental elevator. The Court: Q. When? A. October 26, Continental Fast Line cars. Q. 12877? A. Just the same. Q. 8545? A. That was the same. Vv X. /.,..!. * J- .W. r---- The balance of these Court Cases will appear In April, May, June, July and August numbers. 30 cents each or 53 cents for all, including this issue; 45 cents without this issue. Mr. Sling: Q. They were all Continental Fast Line cars, were they? A. Yes, sir; of Continental Fast Line cars. The Court: Q. What is the next number? ' Mr. Sling: Q. I am asking the witness now about cars in bill of lading number 20,779. A. Continental Fast Line car number 9784. Mr. Wallace: Q. Is that paper in evidence from which you are reading? Mr. Sling: A. I am reading from a bill of lading that I before inquired of the witness respecting the numbers of the cars. Mr. Wallace: Q. Then the paper you are reading from is not in evidence? Mr. Sling: A. It is not necessary for me to have it in evidence. Objected to. Court ruled that prosecutor could ask a question about it. Mr. Sling: [To witness.] Q. I ask you to look at Continental Fast Line car number 9784, and state where it was loaded from. . A. Continental Fast Line car number 9784 was inspected out of Con- tinental elevator November 13. Q. Bill of lading number 22389 now, if you please, I inquire about Pink Line car number 2613, and ask you to state where it is from. A. I have it Erie Line car number 2613. The Court: Q. Erie Line? A. Yes, sir. Q. What was the weight in car? A. I can not tell you the weight of an individual car; can only give you weight of the shipment seven cars there were. Mr. Sling: Q. If Your Honor will just leave that blank, I will read it again later. What other numbers comprise that seven-car shipment? A. 12563, for one. The Court: Q. Erie Line cars? A. Yes, sir; all Erie Line cars; 12563 is the first number. REVOLUTION IN TYPEWRITING MACHINES. Everything has to have a beginning, but when away in the year 1700 or there- abouts, one man in England and another in America, imbued with the idea that the art of printing should be more extended than it then was, essayed the task of putting together a machine that would print by hand and take the place of the labor of the pen (the quill pen it was then), each little thought the other was attempting the same thing over 5,000 miles away. Their efforts, however, were very crude, and for a long time they practically amounted to nothing, except to incite others to make like attempts, until Mr. Sholes and a couple of co-laborers had patented that which at the time they considered a perfect typewriting machine, and which was looked upon as a marvel in its way. That it did not at once receive that recognition which was expected of it was the fault mostly of a lack of appreciation on the part of the public, although the machine was not at first advertised as it should have been, partially because of the fact that its inventors at first met with more or less cool receptions from those who now use it most. The leading law firms thought that they could not possibly use any doc- uments written on the typewriting machine, and even law stenographers were slow in adopting it because of this legal objection; but a beginning was made first among busi- ness men and to them is due the main credit for the adoption of these instruments, until now manufacturers can scarcely furnish them fast enough. The rapid strides in the use of typewriting machines brought them into the notice of a great many mechanical geniuses, who became such able critics and made so many practical tests of the abilities of the instrument that they soon proved that the machines earlier on the market would not meet every necessary demand upon them, and hence applications for patents on new machines began to appear in the patent office at Washington. So many persons have of late years tried their hands at the manufacture of new machines or improvements upon those which the public took to best, that the labor of these inventors has materialized into what is as near to the perfect machine as the present day can conceive in such an instrument. The machine which is the result of all these experiments is the Smith-Premier Typewriter, the only one at the present day which is fulfilling the demand for an easy touch, giving the greatest possible speed, a ribbon having a double motion, sufficient weight of carriage to make the writing firm, with an arrangement of the type bearings insuring perfect alignment, with the strength to make heavy manifolding as neatly as writing on a single sheet, an eas\ r arrangement for quickly inserting omissions just where such omissions should be in- serted, the latter alone being a great advantage over the cumbrous plans of all other machines, but only one of the hundreds of little conveniences to aid the operator in securing rapidity and correctness, as well as the most artistic results, distinguishing this machine from all others, and placing it one hundred years ahead of any invention of its kind. It is easily operated, always responds readily, and the good work which business and professional men receive from its hands causes it to be preferred by all classes of people. Where it is once used, there is great difficulty in getting an operator to manipulate any other, simply because its many conveniences are so strikingly absent from other instruments. TWO HAPPY SHORTHANDERS. Though they are now morally one, they still remain two distinct writers of Haven's Practical Phonography. Writers of a single system, but single no longer except in unison of purpose, future aims, and in that bond which is no bondage, but which merrily makes the world go 'round, making youth light-hearted and old age beautiful the little word of four letters, which, for the two happy beings we have in mind, doubtless contains the whole alphabet of living love. William Gleason. of Chicago, and Jeannette, nee Miller, recently of Tower Hill, this state, were, on February 2nd, made man and wife, in accordance with the law of God and the ordinance of this commonwealth, and have begun their new life at No. 1564 Monroe street. As students of the Chicago Haven College of Shorthand they were known as reg- ular in attendance, painstaking, industrious, cheerful, and knowing them also socially, the writer feels assured that their many good qualities of both heart and hand will continue with them throtigh life, making their pathway bright, helpful, and full of sunshine. That this may be the case and that they may receive every good they wish for themselves is without doubt the desire of all their former fellow-students and ac- quaintances, as it assuredly is of their teachers. ITEMS, PERSONAL AND OTHERWISE. Mr. Ole Owens, just returned from a two years' sojourn east, Saturday last favored with a call, the author of the system he writes. Mr. James Smith, Jr., of ' the Cleveland Stenographers' Association, paid calls at the Chicago Shorthand Schools recently. A lady who entered the Chicago Haven College February 15th without previous shorthand knowledge, finished all the lessons of the theory by February 24th. This is quick time, but it has been done before by us "many a time, many a time", and we ex- pect to go right on until we shame the teachers of old-fashioned methods into the adoption of a modern plan of teaching that does not rob students of the months and years of time and money which the old plans do. "I like your little paper because it has in it just what I want a shorthand paper for at all plenty of shorthand notes. If I want the current news of the day or litera- ture, why, the daily papers, my Harper's and other periodicals will furnish that, but in the meantime I am falling back in my shorthand unless I have pome such models as those furnished by your 'Reporter.' I am still teaching your system and like it better every year." Miss IDA BOTD, East Oregonian Bldg., Pendleton, Oregon. ' True and tried friends are always welcome, consequently "Vick's Floral Guide" is sure of a warm reception, especially when dressed as daintily as this year. The "Nellie Lewis" Carnation on the front of cover, and "Brilliant Poppies" on the back, are unusually attractive, and the numerous colored plates of flowers and vegetables are certainly works of art and merit. The first twenty-four pages, printed in violet ink, describe Novelties and Specialtifs. Send ten cents to JAMES VICK'S SONS, Rochester, N. Y., and procure a copy of this attractive and useful catalogue. It costs nothing, as the ten cents can be deducted from the first order. "VICK'S SEEDS *' Brilliant" Poppy, packet .......' 15c. Roses, Waban and DeGraw, both for 50c. 6 Bare Chrysanthemums, each 50c. ? set 82.50 6 Choice Geraniums, each 25c. ; set 1 ,OO Sweet Corn " Golden Nugget, 1 ' pac" Garden Pea "Charmer," packet 15c. Potato " American Wonder," per lb., 30c. Pansies, our superb strain, look almost human packet 50c. Pansy, Extra choice, packet 25c icket 15c. Any one not now a subscriber can have VICK'S MAGAZINE one year free, who orders SI worth from us before May 1st. riDDAI PllinC ICOO One writer says:" Stands at head iLUnAL UU I U L, lOUZ. of all charmer catalogues." Every person interested in Plants, Flowers or Vegetables, should have one. Price only ten cents, which may be deducted from first order. A packet of 40-lb. Oat FREE with each order when desired. 44 TEACHERS' DEPARTMENT. J5|f~Below we give a fac-simile of the beautiful diplomas prepared for Haven graduates. They are printed on heavy, highly calendered paper, i y x 22 inches in size. Every teacher should have them for their graduates, as any Haven teacher can use them, no matter what may be the name of the school. Write for special terms. C. HAVEN, Tribune-Building, Chicago. is a fac-simile of Haven's College Rules of Order Card. They are printed on heavy cardboard, 22x28 inches in size. Every Haven teacher should have one. Write for price of this and other teachers' supplies to C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, Chicago. INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS OF HAVEN COLLEGES. PLAN OF STUDY AND PRACTICE. Theory students will of course study and practice the lessons in accordance with the rules given in their printed lessons. Students in mock letters will compare their short-hand of the mock letters with the correct forms found in the mock-letter books, re-writing ing out for mistakes in siae of characters, slant, or curve of same, shading and position, as well as proper mock letters ahead of your day's work ; bUC -if any time remains after the mock letters of the day .are- practiced, then the student in the mock letters should compare notes taken in speed class with those of the college readers, practicing every above-described error twelve times, but making no long-hand memoranda. Students in actual work are the only ones short-hand of the college readers, their notes taken in expected to do so thoroughly every spare minute of their sessions net taken up by the actual work of the college. No long-hand is to be written during- sessions, nor copying of words, phrases, or articles from books to be indulged ia, but comparison of your notes as suggested, and practice of every mistake made in student's own nctee as shown by the short-hand of the college readers. If done thoroughly, in accordance with plan explained in second paragraph under this heading, students will find no time for leisure. The teacher in charge will take pleasure in further explaining these plans of practice to students giving uglily .ding- them, as well aa for their strict performance. IMPORTANT NOTICE. Two of the requirements stated in our circulars, as being necessary to the proper fitting of a student for an office position in three months' lime, are, regular attendance, and the proper use of time while in session. Regular attendance means six hours at- tendance daily each week, Monday to Friday inclusive, and four hours each Saturday during term; two of the hours of each day being short-hand speed class. Proper use of time while in session means individual and isolated study and practice in the manner prescribed by the teacher; such isolated the two daily sessions of three hours each, except when engaged with teacher in recitation, kc. With above requirements we have fitted r-^n thus fit any one (who can spell well and has LnURE SUBJECTS and proper use of time above indicated. Students, therefore, who attend irregu- larly; who frequently lose portions of sessions by or by leaving before the end of their sessions; or, prescribed by us, while here, must NOT expect to graduate In three months' time. n pe tent r i the prescribed time, seemingly withoot effort, but we do not claim such results under such circumstances. To graduate each scholar within be spent as we direct, and neither wasted by inter- ruption of study nor wrong plans of study. WE POSITIVELY WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE for students who do/not follow out our tiousiy recommend eucb students for positions. COPYING MOCK LETTERS OR WORDS OR PHRASES is prohibited, as it wastes time. Practice all mistakes yon fi "** in your writing twelve times each, but do no long-band copying here. MANY BUSINESS MEN obtain their short-hand and type-writing r students* have procured situations by answering advertisements in these " want " columns, we would, therefore, advise all students, as soon as through mock letters, to regularly watch such advertisements and ladies* and gents' columns, unless gentlemen are specified. It is not necessary to wait for a diploma before seeking a situation, nor even to wait until in students of good deportment and educai RULES OF DEPORTMENT only of teachers. 2. Unnecessary talk during sessions ma pensed with. - 3. Necessary remarks always to be nude i mirth at an] be asked t be djs- 4. Load talk or bout very undesirable. 5. Politic* or religion are especially to be excluded Dom most not be indulged in here. 7. Beading books or newspapers during' session necessarily leaving- rooms is particularly to be avoided. 9. STUDENTS BRINGING LUNCHEON will please carry Away with, them the remnant*, and > fall upon the fio be placed in waste-baskets, stoves, nor elsewhere 10. Students will please NOT entertain VISITORS 1 1 . Scrape of paper, he. must not be thrown in fire-place. The waste*asket THE COLLEGE READERS, LETTER-BOOKS, Ac. must not, at any time, be hid in desk- drawers or elsewhere, nor taken from the building: ANNUAL CALENDAR. S.pt SOU u Oct. tit Jannaiv Utl to 20th. april Uth to Slit July Ifch to Slit Octobn 14th to 20th. JuuiT SUt t 27th. April KM to Nth lw>sMiiM Onobu 2 IB 10 27th JUL Mth u r*b. M ipnl S9th to Ms; Sth. July nth to 4f 4th. Oct. 2M> u lor 3d Pehnuiy Uth to I7ti *ay 13th to Uth. Input Uth U Uth. Koreabtr Uth to 171 .bnttiv Uth to !4lh j 20U to 26th OT"< l>th to Uth CoTrab,, Uth u J4th- F.b, Uth to 1U. 34. j 7th to Jmu M. Am :ith 10 spt. ut HOT 2*h to ita IK. Much 4th u 10th. lurch llth to 1714 June 10th to 16th. feptrobo >th to Uth. Bfceember Sth to 15ti lUnh Uth to S4th. Juae 17th lo SSd. September 19th u 224. December 16th to 2td. uch 2>th u 31it Jm 24th u 30th. September 2M lo 2t. o30th PUN OF ADVANCEMENT Our lessons in short-hand and type writing being: thoroughly learned and practiced, the former correctly recited and reviewed, the student is advanced to short- hand speed classes. While in these speed classes the theory of phonography is again reviewed by dictation of the teacher in charge, omissions apd mistakes of slant, curvatnre, shading, petition, sue, he., being marked for correction and counted as errors. As soon as students enter speed class, mock letters are dictated to them: but if. while in mock letters, they make as high as twelve errors per day. w. they for six ..._.._... will be taken from mock letters until not more After the completion of twenty-four dayi perfect mar actual dicti 'A in the short- hand theory review for six days, the student is then advanced to iding attendance at speed claat) ABOUT (MPLOMAS. Diploma of proficiency will be granted each scholar of satisfactory deportment and general education, who has learned the theory of short-hand institution ; has completed the course of mock-letter dictation ; has satisfactorily performed amanuensis duties in and for our business office : and who shall, entirely unaided, furnish an accurate report of at least one complete lecture of this institution. Students unable to comply with all of the above conditions during their term can (providing their deportment has been satisfactory while here, and their general education as desired) obtain said diploma after expiration of term, upon evidence received from their employer to the effect that they have been, for at least two consecutive months., satisfactorily per- forming short-hand duties for said employer. something more than the mere ability to perform amanuensis work. Reporting our lectures is d. therefore, students who do ipose not get their diploma while h that the lack of it is ny ev students are competent to fill bility i trr h posit the other qualiflca- , and hav< dictation, providing they poe attended speed class fjg-ularly. HOW ATTENDANCE IS COUNTED, Ordinarily, all terms of one or more fall mo.* UK expire upon the same day of a calendar month as tnat upon which they began; and, except upon Sundays and legal holidays, or in case of illness, full attendance is expected throughout the term. Un- avoidable absences, however, will always be made good to the pupil, providing such absences are for not lees than six consecutive days at a time. TIME LOST AT SPEED CUSS means a loss of speed which cannot be made up. either by staying after hours or working at home. Our hours of speed class are the most import- ant of the day to a student through the theory, and we cannot give proficiency in tim advertised iinlfsHi the pupil attends speed class two full hours daily, Sundays and legal holidays excepted. CARE Of TYPE-WRITING MACHINES is a very necessary part of a type-writer operator's duties, and it is, therefore, desired that the following rules for their care and use be strictly 1. Upon taking place before machine (pre- vious to operating-) student will please wipe all dust from machine and shine the V-shaped portion of the bar on which the wheels of the carriage run, cleaning every particle of dirt from that bar. back as well as front. This bar should be wiped, even if clean. 2. Never leave work in or on the ma- chines. Remove your own scrape or practice sheets, as well as finished work, when done with machine. Keep machine tables clear of work when not used. 3. Finished work should always be handed promptly to the teacher in charge. Practice done with H directs. If written on both sides, practice sheets should be placed in waste -basket. Backer* should be kept by themselves when not in use. 4. If no one is to take the machine from which the tttudent arises, such student shculd place FUN. Bull I hear that Lambkin made a good thing out of his Wall street deal. Behr Why, I thought he lost all his money. Bull He did. But ne married the daughter of the man who got it. Puch . Tbe Previous Words. I do not mind that last word of my wife, I like it, for it shows the storm is past; But what a burden seems this dreary life, While listening to those words before the last! New York Herald. The Art of Matrimony. "Do you expect your marriage to be a happy one, dear?" "O, yes; I guess so. But if it isn't, Jack has promised either a divorce or suicide, so you see I'm really not running much risk." Chicago Tribune. Typewriters ! New or Second hand of ay makes, bought, sold, exchanged and repaired. Also rented anywhere in the country. Largest Stock in America. Not run by a Typewriter Manufacturer. Send for New Illustrated Catalogue describing all Machines. GERBER'S SUPPLIES. NATIONAL TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE 200 LaSalle Street, CHICAGO. ADVERTISING. IF you wish to advertise anything anywhere at any time write to GEO. P. ROWELL & CO., No. 10 Spruce St., New York. EVERY one in need of information on the subject of advertising will do well to obtain a copy of "Book for Advertisers," 368 pages, price one dollar. Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. Contains a careful compilation from the American Newspaper Directory of all the best papers and class journals; gives the circulation rating of every one, and a good deal of informa- tion about rates and other matters pertaining to the business of advertising. Address ROWELI.'S ADVERTISING BUREAU. 10 Spruce St.. N. Y. NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 185 Lit gJLLE ST,, CHICAGO. Mention this advertisement TTERS MISC ELL ANEOUS ACTUAL, BUSINESS Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, will be sent to any address by C. HAVEN, E BUILDING, CHICAGO. ILLINOIS, on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT TESTIMONY Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of 10c. WORDS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN. Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of lOc. ft I I TLJBT AD/~\\/C- Letters, testimony and convention practice, and much more, M L L. inc. MDWVC. together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadelphia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor, you cannot afford to be without a copy. Price. S2.00 to the public but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., CHICAGO, ILL. Copyright, 1892, by Curtis Haven. This includes entire contents. All rights reserved. THE MODERN REPORTER. A Progressive Monthly Magazine of Practical Short-Hand and Type-Writing for the Entire Profession, all Teachers and their Pupils, and the Home Student. ELEVENTH YE AK. ? ADDII I OQO flOcACOPY. NUMBER 4. ArnlL.IOjZ. I$I.OOAYEAR. OUR POPULAR COURT READER. We give another installment of the Court Cases on following pages. They will be complete in six numbers, commencing with last month' s. Price, lOc. each, or 53c. for the six; five numbers, 45c. ; four numbers, 37c. ; three numbers, 25c. ; two numbers, 18c. A RETORT IN KIND. "One of the lady graduates of the Chicago Haven College, in applying for a situation, recently, was asked by the gentleman desiring such services, where she put her punctuation marks in a letter, adding with a sneer, "Do you place them where they belong, or in a bunch at the end of the letter?" "No," was the reply, "I always put the punctuation marks on a separ- ate piece of paper, and pin them to the letter." While for a moment startled at the frankness of such a reply, the maH nevertheless evidently concluded it to be only what he deserved, for he en- gaged the lady; and she is giving excellent satisfaction. ITEMS, PERSONAL AND OTHERWISE. Miss Annie Able, who recently concluded a three months' course at the Chicago Haven Shorthand College, previous to entering which she knew nothing whatever of shorthand, has been placed in a lucrative position by the principal. If this girl was not unfortunate, who is ? Freckled, red haired, cross- eyed, left-handed, and trying to write Cross' Shorthand at one of Dr. Thomas' lectures, recently the poor girl' s cup of sorrow seemed quite full. Under a less heavier load many a stout heart has faltered and failed. The lady phonographer of R. Connable & Sons, wholesale fish mer- chants, 269 S. Water street, had no knowledge whatever of shorthand two months ago; yet, in that time, by our easy, thorough, quick-time methods, we fitted her for the position she now holds. We have made the same record with others, and make no failures with even dull pupils in three months. Situations for all. In these days, when one must have a knowledge of shorthand to get almost any kind of an office position, those not expecting to follow it all their lives have no time to learn the complicated systems. Haven meets this want with a system which can be mastered in principle in a few days, skill for amanuensis position obtained in a few weeks, and for court and convention, or speech reporting in a few months. Records of 300 words a minute have been made by the system; it is as plain as print when written, and is the only system needing neither dictionary nor phrase book. HAVEN'S POPULAR COURT READER. (Continued from last issue.) MALCOM JACKSON ) COURT OF COMMON PLEAS. vs. > BEFORE JUDGE D. D. SEVERNS. DANIEL C. KAIN. ) CASE No. 61. JANUARY TERM, 1874. PITTSBURG, PENN., April 2, 1874. For the plaintiff appear Messrs. Kelly and Leach. For the defendant appears Mr. Bernard Baker. TESTIMONY FOR PLAINTIFF. MALCOM JACKSON, the plaintiff, sworn, testifies as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. Mr. Kelly: Q. What is your business, Mr. Jackson? A. I am superintendent of a glass factory. Q. Are you employed at present? A. Yes, sir; with James Whalen & Company. Q. Where were you employed in 1871? A. I was employed from April, '71, to March, '73, by Mr. Daniel C. Kain, trading under the firm name of D. C. Kain & Company, Gla^s Manufacturers. Q. What were your duties? A. I was general superintendent of their pot-house. Q. What were you to get for your services? A. Fifteen hundred dollars per year. One hundred dollars per month, as regular salary. The other three hundred dollars per year were payable to me at the end of the year, providing my services were satisfactory. Q. And in case they were not, how was that to be determined? A. Mr. Kain was to decide that himself, and if such was his opinion, our contract was to be terminated at such date. Q. How long was the contract made for? A. For one year, subject to renewal on same terms. Q. Did you get your fifteen hundred dollars at the end of the first year, that is, your regular salary of one hundred dollars per month, and the three hundred bonus? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you continue in service on the same terms the second year? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you get your three hundred bonus, the second year, in addi- tion to your one hundred dollars per month? A. No, sir. Q. Why not? Objected to. Objection sustained. - f~5 L, '- J, . .. L \~^~'- I / \ /. A VX> Q. Did Mr. Kain refuse to pay you the three hundred dollars bonus for the second year? A. He did. Q. Did he give any reason for withholding it? A. Not to me. Q. Did he say he was dissatisfied with your services for the year? A. No, sir. Q. Did he give you no reason for terminating contract? A. No, sir. He did not terminate the contract. Q. Who terminated it? A. I did. Q. For what reason? A. I had an opportunity f-or getting better pay than my present position. Q. Then, as far as you know, Mr. Kain was perfectly satisfied with your services for the last year you were with him? A. Yes, sir. Q. And you do not know why he refused to pay you the three hundred dollars bonus due you for the second year's salary? A. Not unless he was angry on account of my leaving his employ. Answer objected to, and motion made to strike from the record. Objection sustained. Motion taken under consideration. Q. Did you ever have any conversation with Mr. Kain in which he stated that he would send you a check for the second three hundred dollars? A. I had such a conversation. Q. When was that and where was it? A. It was in the office of Mr. Kain, at Chambersburg, a few days after my second year. Q. Did he say that he would send the money to you? A. He stated he would send a check for the amount. Q. Who was present at that time? A. I think his son, John Kain, Jr., was present. Q. Do you know how he came to be in the office at the time? A. He was bookkeeper for his father, at the Chambersburg factory. Q. Who is the bookkeeper now, John Kain, Jr.? A. Yes, sir; he is bookkeeper for his father, John C. Kain, trading as John C. Kain & Co. CROSS EXAMINATION. Mr. Baker: Q. When was this contract entered into between you and Mr. Kain? A. Late in March, 1871. Q. Where was it made? A. In Mr. Kain's office, at Chambersburg. IN THE MATTER OF THE PROBATE OF " A PAPER PROPOUNDED AS A CODI- SURROGATE'S COURT, CIL TO THE LAST WILL AND TESTA- I County of Camden, State of N. J. MENT BEFORE HON. H. M. PINTER, OF SURROGATE. CHARLES CARTER, Deceased. J CAMDEN, N. J., May. 15, 1852. For the proponent appears Mr. Peter Day. For the contestants appear Messrs. Wide and Wake. DR. JAMES LELAND, a witness on behalf of the proponent, being duly sworn, testified: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Day: Q. Dr. Leland, did you ever attend the testator, Mr. Charles Carter professionally ? A. Yes; I was his family physician for twenty years prior to his death. Q. Where did he reside during his last illness ? A. At 1405 Walnut Street. Q. You attended him until the day of his death ? A. Yes. Q. I have a paper here which I wish you would look at carefully, and tell me if you ever saw it before ? [Hands paper to witness.] A. Yes. [Examining paper.] This is a codicil to Mr. Carter's will. Q. Is that your signature ? [Pointing to the paper.] A. Yes. Q. Did you sign this document in the presence of the other witnesses, whose names are thereunto attached ? A. Yes. Q. And did they sign in your presence on the same occasion ? A. Yes; we all signed our names in the order shown on the document, one signing immediately after the other. Q. Did Mr. Carter sign first or last ? A. First. Q. In the presence of those witnesses ? A. Yes; that is, he made his mark, he was too weak to write. Q. Was the codicil read over to him before he signed it ? A. It was. Q. The entire document ? A. Yes; every word of it. Q. In the presence of yourself and the other witnesses? A. Yes. v .ZXTvTT^>. V o >- \ o \ L 'i X v t X v X Y X V / V X X X v* * X Y X */ x, ?' xj X V" X X X x X x x X .'. X X X z '' ,- .; .- V /. #-s .- ,\ X X ;.; V Y ,- ^ ^ ;.; X X x X X x. x a X x 4. OMl&4irH&4 V ;.; / * X .' /. X :;. ft -..- .\ ro :; V x - '.- V '.- ft V -*. rr y '.' X V -.- - /y. X, \ X X X X X X, X x X X X X x x X y X s / :/ .-' X ;.' V X Y X X X n. *.*, X x '.-.' 3 V~S y^ * X X X x X X, 30 X X, X x x X, 4> x '-'. ' fylM.$MMn. 9 (0 ^ /J > -j- .-. ... ~y .-, fl ;< .'>; V V .; v ;._' .'' v \' : V : (*, Y )(. H X X X g X K K X k s X x: 1 V X X X X X X X X X .' 3 1 V. -..-. V ;:-. V--S \* Ij x, X x x X 2 to /! ft- 1 i J ^-5 2 /o ft /2- / z. 1 l^-S 9 /o ff fl- / 7- 3 ff.-S S. LESSONS RECORD. No. KAME. 3 /o A.M Ji J 7 f fo H AM. 3 A.M T.2VL A.M AM AM FWI. AM AM. AM ?M. AM AM ?M. AM TM For all information address 1'. II A V i:\. Tribune Bltlg.. CHICAGO. LESSONS RECORD. // r- t r ; S3 r~rr / .X * i v -/t^- gT^T 7 A //S~ . Z> J -2 J 7 16 / /2 / ^^ FUN. (From Puck.) Kind Son (back from the city) I didn't know exactly what to bring you. mother, but here is the material for a new silk dress. Loving Mother (opening package) Oh, George, this would be just what I wanted if I had only bought it myself. ADVERTISING. Ah. when the sunny tresses grow Out from the scalp and we behold Two different colors, then we know That all that's blondined is not gold. IF you wish to advertise anything anywhere at any time write to GEO. I'. ROWELL & CO., No. 10 Spruce St., New York. ____ EVERY one in need of information on t In- subject of advertising will do well to obtain a copy of "Book for Advertisers,'' 308 pages, price one aollar. Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. Contains a careful compilation from the American Newspaper Directory of all the best papers and class journals; gives the circulation rating of every one, and a good deal of informa- tion about rates and other matters pertaining to the business of advertising. Address i;o\vi-:i.i,'s ADVERTISING BURKAT, Hi Spnice St., N. V. Typewriters ! * h . e can New or Second hand of all makes, bought, sold, exchanged and repaired. Also rented anywhere in the country. Largest Stock in America. Not run bv a Typewriter Manufacturer. Send for New Illustrated Catalogue dascribing all Machines. GERBER'S SUPPLIES. NATIONAL TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE 200 LaSalle Street, CHICAGO. WANT :0: TKACHKlt OR STUDKXT As PERMANENT OFFICE ASSISTANT. Either Gentleman or Lady. No preference.qual!- cattong being equal. Salary $750. and Railway tare paid to Office if engaged. Enclose reference Tind self-addressed stamped envelope to HENRY JONES, SECRETARY, CHICAGO, ILL V SEND FOR CATALOGUE. - NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 135 LK 8KLLE 8T, GHICIGO, LETTERS MISCELLANEOUS ACTUAL BtSINESS Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, will be sent to any address by C. HAVEN, TRIBUNE BUILDING, CHICAGO. ILLINOIS, on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT TESTIMONY Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN. Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of lOt. ALL THE ABOVE Letters, testimony and convention practice, and much more, together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadelphia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor, you cannot afford to be without a copy. Price. '2.00 to the public but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bidg., CHICAGO, ILL. Copyright, 1892, by Curtis Haven. This includes entire contents. All rights reserved. THE MODERN REPORTER. A Progressive Monthly Magazine of Practical Short-Hand and Type-Writing xbr the Entire Profession, all Teacher* and their Pupils, and the Home Student. ELEVENTH YEAR. I MAY I 8Q9 t lOc. A COPY. NUMBERS. J ITIHl, IOOZ. '/$1.00 A YEAE. OUR POPULAR COURT READER. We give another installment of the Court Cases on following pages. They will be complete in six numbers, commencing with March issue. Price, lOc. each, or 53c. for the six; five numbers, 45c. ; four numbers, 36c. ; three numbers, 27c. ; two num- bers, 18c. ITEMS, PERSONAL AND OTHERWISE. Miss Emma Burlingame is probably one of the lighest hearted and industrious ladies in the short-hand profession. Of course, she is a Haven writer. There are fjew better caligraph operators and Haven short-handers than Miss Christina Paulson, amanuensis for Nusbaum & Co., 230 and 232 Adams Street. The Mercantile Publishing and Advertising Co., 238 and 240 Fifth Ave., have a worthy young lady short-hander and typewritist in the person of Miss Josephine Schmitt. A high rate of speed and good work are two characteristics of Miss Bertha Usborne, the pleasant little lad}' Haven short-hander and typewritist of Patrick's Importing Dry Goods Specialty House, 226 and 228 Adams Street. Miss Grace Dow is the capable lady stenographer and typewritist of the Practical Art School Co., Bort Building. Miss Dow is a three months Haven graduate, and while at college a month before the termination of above course did as good work as many stenographers of several years' experience. She had no previous knowledge of the art when she began her course at the Chicago Haven College. Miss Cassie J. Lincoln, a recent three months Haven graduate, after being but one week in her position, taken at expiration of her course, had her salary materially advanced, and has been given as her future task the most difficult work of the office, because, during that first week she proved herself to be superior to the two other short-hand writers in same office, although they had long experience. In these days when one must have a knowledge of short-hand to get almost any kind of an office position, those not expecting to follow it all their lives have no time to learn the complicated systems. Haven meets this want with a system which can be mastered in principle in a few days, skill for amanuensis position obtained in a few weeks, and for court and convention, or speech reporting, in a few months. Records of 300 words a minute have been made by the system; it is as plain as print when written, and is the only system needing neither dictionary nor phrase book. HAVEN'S POPULAR COURT READER. (Continued from Last Issue.) .y. COMMONWEALTH ) COURT OF OVER AND TERMINER. vs. > COUNTY OF PHILADELPHIA, PENN. GEORGE BECKETT ETAL. ) SAMUEL CAMPBELL, P. J. PHILADELPHIA, PENN., October n, 1855. Prosecutor William Matlackfor the Commonwealth. A. Carpenter and R. L. Kerr, Esqs., for prisoners. FIRST DAY AFTERNOON SESSION. AUGUST SCULL, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Matlack: Q. What is your name? A. August Scull. Q. What is your business? A. My business is brass finishing. Q. Where do you live? A. At No. 277 South Street. Q. Did you know Mr. Charles Hill in his lifetime? A. I knew him well, sir. Q. How well, or intimately, did you know him? A. As intimately as a man could by having six or seven years knowl- edge. Q. Where were you in the habit of meeting him? A. Up in his office. Q. How frequently did you see him there? A. Well, for the last year, I saw him twice a week. Q. Where else were you in the habit of meeting him? Did you ever meet him at his place of residence? A. Yes, sir. Q. About how frequently? A. Every Sunday for a year. Q. That was at Watts', was it? A. Yes, sir. Q. On South Street? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you .ever meet him on the street? A. Very seldom, except by appointment. Q. About how often were you in the habit of meeting him, putting all your meetings together? A. Two or three times a week. V O **V*" '"0"' ^ o- f fc c ,<-/" s-' \ f^^~ / / ^7> /^ A o../ \ 6 7 1 *^ | o \ vuc/"" T ^ ' ^ ">...... .^../...p b' o \ Q. And for how long a period of time? A. For the last year. Q. You knew him intimately andwell, did you not? A. Yes; and for six years previous, but the last year was most intimate. Q. Did you see the body lying at the morgue in the month of May? A. Yes, sir. Q. Was that on the same day of the discovery, or was it the day fol- lowing? A. It was the day following. Q. At what time of the day? A. At eleven o'clock in the morning. Q. With whom did you go? A. With Samuel Garrison. Q. Did you see more than one body lying there? A. No, sir. Q. Whose body was it you saw lying there? A. Mr. Charles Hill's. Q. What satisfied you that it was his? A. Its general appearance and contour and outline; I was satisfied it was his beyond all question, the moment I saw it; I could not be mistaken. Q. What did you know it by specify what it was? A. I saw the small imperial under his lip, which I knew he always wore while alive; but the body was his, and I was so satisfied with the gen- eral appearance that I had no doubt it was the remains of Charles Hill, my friend. Q. Were there any other peculiarities which you noticed? A. Well, he had a peculiarity, while living, a broken finger on his right hand. I noticed his hand lying across his stomach his right hand was lying across his stomach and I noticed his finger. Q. How about his hair? A. The hair was a dark brown, and I was satisfied it was Hill's hair. Q. And as to the shape of the forehead? A. The shape of the forehead was his. It was unquestionably the body of Charles Hill. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Kerr: Q. Have you taken an active part in the prosecution of the case? A. Well, I believed I should do so. Q. You have, have you? A. Yes, sir; I have. Q. You have given money for this prosecution? v IA ~y v I C..;^0.! 7. s as legible as print when learned, and records of over 300 words a minute have been made by it. Send for circular of testimonials and free first lesson. THE COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF Haven's Practical Phonography Contains Self- Teaching Lessons, together with a number of Short-Hand Reading Paires, including Correspondence, Court and Convention Report- ing, with Key in common print, making this book the only treatise on Short-Hand Writing com- plete in one volume. Price, $2, free of postage to any address. Order of CURTIS HAVEN, Room 37, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL. Or of any teacher of the system. Whether you are Teacher. Expert, Learner, or about to learn Type-Writing no matter wkat make of machine you favor you cannot afford to be without a copy of Haven's Complete Manual OF Type-Writing A Self-Instructor for the Home Student, a Book > -, ""*/"'* " "(L/ ,..L^/x -,.u.v- 1 ..... e... .. ) GEORGE BINDER } COMMON PLEAS CpURT. vs. V BEFORE JUDGE JAMES ATKINSON'. CASE No. 309. HENRY T. NAGLE. ) NEW YORK, N. Y., Nov. 6, 1845. Samuel S. Stover, for plaintiff. Charles Willard and Marcus Tooler, for defendant. TESTIMONY FOR PLAINTIFF. GEORGE BINDER, the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. What is your business, MF. Binder? A. Wholesale dealer in telegraphic outfits. Q. Did Henry T. Nagle, the defendant, ever purchase goods of you? A. Yes, sir; for many years prior to January 29, 1843. Q. Why did he stop buying of you at that date? Objected to. Objection sustained. Q. He stopped buying of you at that date, did he? A. He did. Q. Was his account square with you then? A. It was not. He then owed me a balance of two hundred and ninety- eight dollars and fifty-seven cents. Q. How was this balance settled? A. By a note drawn for that amount, payable thirty days from date. Q. Is this the note, Mr. Binder? A. It is. Q. Was it ever paid? A. It was not, or the protest would not be written on the back of it, and I would not now be in possession of it. Q. W T as no amount whatever paid on account of that note after protest? A. There was not. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard: Q. Mr. Binder, what does this amount, two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven cents, represent, and how far back does it date? A. It dates back about two years, or a little over, and it represents, what Mr. Nagle owes me. Q. I understand that the last bill was bought a few weeks previous to the making of this note is that so? A. Possibly it was. ..ex .-. '..Vs.. / ..ravas \ S "/ *> i>->. V_ ~"\o' \ ! A ~v ^ I .......A .... /C7N ....... /vfTSp.. J ...A v 3\u />. * ..X ~.l _ o u> ...I / v-O -^/ . . 1 O ' V ^s... o.^C-^-.X) ^V^I(V N ^d" "\ .... . ,........ *X^ .. ..X . . -J. . .../*. -^ * . .. ^X V>. ....... ^ ....O. *~\ -^ Q. And that the goods were delivered on the day that the note was made? A. Yes, sir; I think they were. Q. Has there been no payment made on account of this note? A. I have no recollection of any. Q. Do you not recollect of one day in January, of this year, receiving twenty-five dollars from Mr. Nagle on account of this note? A. I do not. Q. Nor twenty dollars? A. No, sir. Q. And you called for the money several times, did you not? A. Yes, sir; I did. Q. Did not Mr. Nagle, on a certain day in January, of this year, promise to pay twenty-five dollars on account of this note? A. Maybe so. He used to make about six promises a week of a similar kind. Q. Did he not meet you at Desbrosses Street Ferry, one day in that month, of that year, and pay you twenty-five dollars on account of this note? A. I remember meeting him several times at that ferry, but I never received any money from him at any time on account of this note. Q. You are positive that you do not remember receiving any money from Mr. Nagle on account of this note? A. I know I never did. Q. I believe you said in your direct examination that the note was for thirty days? A. Yes, sir. Q. This is the note, I believe? A. It is. Q. This note reads " one month from date " which is correct? A. The note, of course. Q. Then you admit that, in this instance, your memory was at fault? A. Well, as to the thirty days, yes. Q. But not 'as to having received payment on account of this note from Mr. Nagle? A. No; as to that, I am positive. Q. Of what? A. Of never having received any money on that note. Q. Now, Mr. Binder, do you not remember, upon another occasion, in January of this year, when you called upon Mr. Nagle, as he was about leaving his office upon an important business engagement, on which occasion -3\1S - J V*" ~ .^..r.^X.^.r...^..:. .. -~V..: --~1 ; --** a ^ *N tv^ ^ ^ ; fx ^ V- .. ^ - v w. (2. ^* " I ^ ' ' ' ^ I S* ....(..,X ...~ <.-C. V \ he paid you money on account of this note? A. I do not. Q. 'What sort of telegraphic instruments was this last bill for this bill for goods delivered on the day the note was made what sort of instru- ments? A. There were some relays and sounders, and some small articles which I do not now remember. Q. How many of the articles included in that bill were returned to you by the defendant? A. None of them. Q. Did not Mr. Nagle come to you on that day, after the note was given y*ou, and notify you that the goods you sent him were not as represented and that he intended to return them or some of them to you the next day? A. No, sir. Q. Did he not return them to you? A. No, sir. Q. Do you mean to say you never received back from Mr. Nagle any portion of the goods sent him by you on the day this note was signed? A. I most emphatically mean to say I did not receive any of my goods back from Mr. Nagle, after the signing of that note. Q. And never received any complaint about them? A. ' No, sir; not that I remember. Q. Ah, not that you remember. But it might have happened, you think? A. No, sir; I do not think so. RE-DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. Mr. Binder, are you positive that you never received any payment on account of this note? A. I am very positive that I did not. Q. Do your books or any memoranda of yours contain any such entries, affecting this note? A. No, sir. Q. Would they, if such payment had been made? A. They certainly would. RE-CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard: Q. Are you positive that Mr. Nagle never complained about your last sale to him? A. I am very positive that he never did, and he never returned any of these goods to me. PLAINTIFF RESTS. h ........ 1. A A.x .. I...L ^>..C ......... . Ao I J \ J 4f\ j '..U^A- .1. SECOND DAY. NEW YORK, N. Y., Nov. 6, 1845. TESTIMONY FOR THE DEFENSE. HENRY T. NAGLE, the defendant, sworn in his own behalf. DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard: Q. This promissory note, for two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven cents, which you gave Mr. George Binder, for goods pur- chased, did you pay it when it became due ? A. I did not. Q. Why not ? A. Because I found out, after giving the note, that Mr. Binder had not sent me the kind of goods ordered, and the goods were inferior to the ones I had previously bought at same price. Q. Did you ever speak to Mr. Binder of this ? A. Yes, sir, repeatedly, and sent the goods back to him, but he would not receive them. Q. Did he give you any reason for not taking the goods back ? A. Only that he would not receive them. Q. You are positive that he never gave any reason ? A. I am positive he never did to me. Q. When did you first complain personally to Mr. Binder, in relation to the goods bought of him, January 29, 1843 ? A. It was either the first or second or third day of February, 1843. I received the goods a day or two after the note was given, and I called on Mr. Binder the very day I received the goods, but he was out, so I left word for him to call on me, which he did on either the first, second, or third of February, 1843, and I then complained personally about them. He then said he would not receive them back. Q. You asked him to take them back, did you ? A. I did. Q. And he positively refused, you say ? A. Yes, sir; positively. Q. Giving what reason ? A. No reason, only that he would not take them back. Q. And you say, because the goods were not as represented you refused to pay this note of two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven cents ? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you ever offer to pay Mr. Binder what you claim you rightly owed him ? A. Yes, sir; if he would, from the amount of the note, deduct twenty .^. .'..1 . < ^ . -^ 1 "^w, ......... ................ So -o ....Tlp ^^ V O 1 J V" )*' These Court Cases began in March issue; the balance will appear in July and August numbers. lOc. for each, or 53c. for all, including this issue; 45c. without this issue; 86c. for four numbers; 27c. for three; 18c. for two numbers. dollars, the price of the instruments I desired to return, I was willing to pay the balance. Q. Did you offer this money personally to Mr. Binder on or before the day the note became due? A. I offered it several times before, and on the day the note became due, also. Q. Did he accept? A. He did not; he positively refused to accept the money. Q. Giving you no reason? A. None whatever. Q. Did you offer him the money at any time after the note was protested? A. I offered him, some days after the note was protested, the same amount as I had offered him before, but I refused to pay the protest on the note, and also refused to pay for the goods I didn't want. Q. And you tried to return the goods? A. I did, several times, before and afterward, and am willing to return them yet, as I have them in the same condition as when bought. Q. Has Mr. Binder, at any time, received any money from you on account of your indebtedness to him? A. Twice on account; and he was willing to receive the amount I offered him before the note was due, but he would only receive that money as an account payment. He declined to receive it with the instruments, as a full payment, returning me the note. Q. You say you offered to pay that note after it was protested? A. I offered, after the note was protested, to pay Mr. Binder two hundred and seventy-eight dollars and fifty-seven cents cash, and return the goods not ordered, if he would give me the note. But I would not pay the protest, and, of course, I refused to pay for goods that were not the ones ordered. I made this offer before the note came due, and the day the note was due, but only once after it was due a few days after. Q. Was your offer accepted? A. It was not. Q. Did you ever pay Mr. Nagle any money on account of this note? A. I did. Q. When? A. On one occasion it was January of this year I paid him Mr. Binder twenty-five dollars, and again, on the 230! of same month, I paid him twenty dollars, both amounts on account of the bill. Q. Was that all? A. That was all that I paid him on account of the bill. Q. Did you get receipts for these amounts? THE GOVERNMENT ENDORSES THE SMITH PRE3IIER TYPEWRITER. The war department of the government having occasion for 150 type- writing machines, solicited tests from the different manufacturers which, it is understood, were more severe than those required in previous type- writing tests, the result being that the Smith Premier was awarded the order by the government, which thereby practically, though unofficially, endorses that machine as the most perfect instrument on the market. This endorsement is something more than that which might be made by any firm, for the government has a wider range of experience in type- writing work of every description ; it employs a great many operators, and it has among its employes in different departments many mechanics of skill, whose judgment in respect to the working qualities of machines is of the highest order, no matter whether it be in respect to typewriting or other machines. It is, therefore, to be expected that the government has not failed to avail itself of the skill in typewriting and general mechanics which these employes have, and the giving of such a large order to the Smith Premier, the largest order ever given by the government, is pretty clear evidence that that machine is the best in use, a decision which is of still greater value when it is considered that they have had in use in their different departments every known make of typewriting machines that are more than a mere toy. The growth of this machine in popular favor has been a wonderful one. Although not more than a few years before the public, it has demonstrated its fitness for all kinds of work and the many conveniences of which it is possessed over all other machines, having crept into favor so rapidly and so surely, that it bids fair at a veiy early date to eclipse them all in popularity in every civilized city on the globe. The Smith Premier Manufacturing Co., who own this wonderful ma- chine, is presided over by a gentleman who has the reputation of doing well with every thing he undertakes, and spares no pains or money to make his undertaking not only superior for the time being, but permanently so. In the case of the Smith Premier typewriter, it is twenty years ahead of its time, so that it is impossible for any of the old machines or new ones, to very well compete with it in advantages, as all its important points are well secured by patent rights, and the company have sufficient capital to see that these rights are respected. It is a matter of pure enterprise and superiority that has enabled this company to successfully compete with other machines that have for years held the balance of power, which they are fast relinquishing to the inimitable Smith Premier. MAN'S INCONSTANCY. (Exchange.) Pillbury I hear Partington's pretty young lady typewriter has left him. What was the reason? Knowall I believe she caught him kissing his wife. If you want the address of any stenog- rapher in the United States or Canada, send for How's Directory of Stenographers of the United States, handsomely bound in cloth and gold, SI. 00. THE HOW PUBLISHING COMPANY, Tribune Bldg., NEW YORK, N. Y. COPYRIGHTED 1890. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THK Short-Hand Teacher's Companion. A handy volume of information of value to every Teacher of SHORT-HAND AND TYPE-WRITING, Containing Review Exercises, a full set (in synopsis) of Lectures to Students, together with a detailed explanation of the means bv which EVEN DULL STUDENTS Are, by the Haven plan of instruction, in use at Haven Colleges, IN ONE TO THREE MONTHS, Without any previous knowledge of these arts on the Student's part, FITTED FOR POSITIONS Requiring skill in both Short-Hand and Type-writing; minutely describing the Student's duties and pro- gress, step by step, from the taking of first lesson to graduation, with the reason for each step ; Together with much other information of value to Teachers of any system. BY CURTIS HAVEN, Expert Short-hand Reporter and Type-writist, Founder of the Ha- ven Colleges of Practical Phonography and Type-writing, Author of Haven's Practical Phonography, "Haven's Complete Manual of Type-writing, Etc., Etc. PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOE, Tribune Building, CHICAGO. "Sho\ving the advantages possessed by Haven's distinct joined vowels over othe' systems in making legible, without decreasing speed, those words wherein vo\veh> must be written, etc., etc. GRAHAM. HAVEN. LINDSLEY CROSS. Ape i \ V 1 ^ Away ^ < ^ ^ Iowa 2 ^ ^ ^ I. PITMAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Evaporate. ^ V \ I. PITMAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Emigrant ^ ^ ^^ Immigrant ^ v-j. ^ B. PI THAN. I PITMAN. HAVEN. ivoom ^ .^ Prx ^ ^ Leave Love Will Kave You will Kave teen PITMAN. r\^ /a . /v /V, f \^ ^^ HAVEN. r\ ^^ ^^-^ / ^ T i is the ONLY system of SHORT-HAND requiring NO dictionary or phrase book; the only system available for every purpose for which PHONOGRAPHY or PENMANSHIP are em- ployed; the ONLY system by which the notes of one writer, when correctly written, can be read with CERTAINTY by ANY other writer of the sys- tem; and the onlv system which one has time to learn these busy days. INDORSED BY THE LEGAL FRATERNITY, COLLEGE v AC- ULTIES, THE PRESS AND THE PROFESSION AS T.1E "MOST KAPIDLY READ AND WRITTEN AND EASIEST LEARNED of any system." Some students have even learned to use it and satisfactorily fill short-hand posi- tions within the brief space of one to two months' 1 time, without any previous knowledge of any short-hand. ANYONE can learn it in three montht if the directions in the book are followed. This short-hand writing 's as legible as print when learned, and records of over 300 words a minute have been made by it. Send for circular of testimonials and free first lesson. THE COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF Haven's Practical Phonography Contains Self-Teaching Lessons, together with a number of Short-Hand Reading Pages, including Correspondence, Court and Convention Report- ing, with Key in common print, making this book the only treatise on Short-Hand Writing com- plete in one volume. Price, $2, free of postage to any address. Order of CURTIS HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL. Or of any teacher of the system. Whether you are Teacher. Expert, Learner, or about to learn Type-Writing no matter wbat make of machine you favor you cannot afford to be without a copy of Haven's Complete Manual OF Type-Writing A Self -Instructor for the Home Student, a Book oi Reference for the Expert, a Guide to the Teac-wj. and a Text-Book for all Schools and Colleger. The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of type- writer work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial- accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of con- trast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadel- phia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of prac- tical operators. "The only complete work on Type-Writing published." Price, $2, free of postage, to any address. Orderof CURTIS HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL. Or of any Haven teacher. ANYONE CAN QAIN Short-Hand TYPE-WRITING SKILL IN THREE MONTHS BY HA.VEN'8 SYSTEM. NO FAILURES. No previous knowledge of either art required. Haven teachers insure all students speedy and thorough tuition in both Short-hand and Type- Writing. qualifying many students in as short a time as one to two months, and requiring no longer time than three months for even the dullest, so long as they possess a common-school education and study and practice as directed. INSTRUCTION PERSONALLY OR BY MAIL SPECIAL NOTICE. As there are a few teachers of other systems who, being able to qualify in three to six months an occasion ally brignt student who has had pre- vious study at home, and which schools are on that score advertising that they can graduate students in three months' time (meaning of course, not all their students), it is necessary that we call attention to the difference between such misleading advertisements and our own claims, as follows: * We qualify ALL students within three mouths the bright ones in much less time. Students who can by any possibility master and gain speed in three to six months by other systems, can be given such skill by the Haven system in one month. Students who require from six to twelve months to gain skill in other systems require no longer than two months by the Haven plan . Those w,ho can NOT learn other systems under any conditions, can succeed by the Haven plan in the guaranteed three months' time. Haven's is the only system within the compre- hension of everyone. As before stated, we make NO FAILURES where our instructions are followed. Teachers who cannot meet these claims by the system they teach should investigate Haven's, and change, if they desire to be up with the times. Students not successful at other shools, as well as all persons desirous of learning in shortest possible time the fastest written and easiest read system, should correspond with the Haven Col- lege nearest their address. HAVEN COLLEGES - OF - Short-Hand and Type-writing are located in a number of principal cities. The one conducted by Mr. and Mrs. Curtis Haven in per- son is in the Tribune Build- ing, S. E.Cor. Madison and Dearborn Sts., CHICAGO, ILL. Funny-graphs from Exchanges. The girl stood on the burning deck, And calmly met her fate; She feared not death because she knew, She had put her hat on straight. ADVERTISING. Uncle Jerry Rusk says he is not so much afraid of being struck by Presidential lightning as he is of having a brand of baking powder named after him. Kate Field's remark that Congressman Bolivian's excessive economy leads him to talk through his nose to save his throat is almost as unparliamentary as was the allegation made concerning another parsi- monious person who wore a wart on the back of his neck to save the expense of a collar button. Typewriters ! New or Second hand of all makes, bought, sold, exchanged and repaired. Also rented anywhere in the country. Largest Stock in America. Not run by a Typewriter Manufacturer. Send for New Illustrated Catalogue describing all Machines. GERBER'S SUPPLIES. NATIONAL TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE 200 LaSalle Street, CHICAGO. IF you wish to advertise anything anywhere at any time write to GEO. P. ROWELL & CO., No; 10 Spruce St., New York. EVERY one in need of information on the subject of advertising will do well to obtain a copy of "Book for Advertisers," 36S pages, price one (foliar. Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. Contains a careful compilation from the American Newspaper Directory of all the best papers and class journals; gives the circulation rating of every one, and a good deal of informa- tion about rates and other matters pertaining to the business of advertising. Address RO WELL'S ADVERTISING BUREAU, 10 Spruce St.. N. Y. jp he SEND FOR CATALOGUE. >. 1. f well * G., NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 185 II SILLE 8T,, GHICIGO. Mention this advertisement TTERS MISCELLANEOUS ACTUAL BUSINESS Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, will be sent to any address by C. HAVEN, TRIBUNE BUILDING, CHICAGO. ILLINOIS, on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT TESTIMONY Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of 10c. WORDS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of Iflt. ALL THE ABOVE Letters, testimony and convention practice, and much more, together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadelphia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert*operators. "Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor, you cannot afford. to be without a copy. Price. *2.00 to the public but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., CHICAGO, ILL. Copyright, 1892, by Curtis Haven. This includes entire contents. All rights reserved. THE MODERN REPORTER. A Progressive Monthly Magazine of Practical Short-Hand and Type-Writing for the Entire Profession, all Teacher* and their Pupils, and the Home Student. ELEVENTH YEAH. ) Ml IV I QQO ( lOc. A COPY. NUMBER 7. JULl, lOOZ. 1 $1.00 A YEAB. OUR POPULAR COURT READER. We give the concluding installment of the Court Cases on following pages. They are complete in five numbers, commencing with March issue. Price, lOc. each, or 45c. for the five; four numbers, 36c. ; three numbers, 27c. ; two numbers, 18c. ITEMS, PERSONAL AND OTHERWISE. Mr. Victor Benson is the courteous shorthander and typewritist of the Inter- national Mortgage Syndicate, Washington Block, 108 Fifth avenue. Miss Christina Hannah is the capable young lady stenographer and typewritist of Carl C. Shepard Co., interior furnishings. 302 Michigan avenue. The receipt is gratefully acknowledged of a crate of luscious Texas peaches from friend and former pupil, Mr. Jeff. D. Ellis, of Tyler, that State. There is no stenographer and typewritist in the business that does neater and more exact woik than Miss Annie Abels, the charming little lady Haven shorthander of the Redpath Lyceum Bureau. She was ready for a position within two months after taking first lesson. Miss Xora Conley is the efficient Haven shorthander and typewritist of the whole- sale clothing firm of Spitz, Landauer & Co., 152 Market street. Miss Conley has also done some very difficult work in the way of taking from dictation editorial matter for a leading Chicago daily. Mr. J. G. Sprankle has been engaged by the editor and publisher of the Inland Printer, as his shorthand and typewriting private secretary. This is a difficult posi- tion to hold, and as there were many competitors for the place, Mr. Sprankle's selection speaks well for his ability as a Haven writer. In these days when one must have a knowledge of short-hand to get almost any kind of an office position, those not expecting to follow it all their lives have no time to learn the complicated systems. Haven meets this want with a system which can be mastered in principle in a few days, skill for amanuensis positions obtained in a few weeks, and for court and convention, or speech reporting, in a few months. Records of 300 words a minute have been made by the system; it is as plain as print when written, and is the only system needing neither dictionary nor phrase book. HAVEN'S POPULAR COURT READER. (Continued from Last Issue.) jr../, ^ o 1-7 "I ^'t- - y - .1 t0 ^ J -i 7 V^ I b (6- /> ;j_.\..../ r^..^-.. .llJi " i^ r .^ .( (o ^ > " lo t "" I -^ ^_^^ f ~^' "~ (. _(* "/"o" 6 - p.. t ..n..v. 7 > A. I did not. He promised to send me receipts, but never did. Q. Why did you not get receipts at the time these two payments were made? A. Because they were made under circumstances which made it impossible to get them. Q. How was that? A. The first amount of twenty-five dollars was paid in Desbrosses Street Ferry, upon my meeting him there, and the second amount just out- side of my office door, when I was starting out to fulfill an important engage- ment, and had only just time to catch the train. Q. What makes you so positive about paying these amounts? A. Well, I remember the transactions distinctly, and the entries are in my cash-book for those days. Q. Is this the cash-book you refer to? [Showing book.] A. It is. Q. Can you point out the entries you refer to? A. Yes, sir; there they are. [Indicating.] This is the first entry. [Reading.] January 13, 1845, P a ^ to George Binder, on account, twenty- five dollars. And here is the other, in same words, under date of 23d, same month and year, twenty dollars. Q. In whose handwriting are those entries? A. They are in my own handwriting. Q. You kept your own books at that time, did you? A. I did yes, sir; have always kept them and do now. Cash-book offered in evidence and marked Exhibit A. Q. Have you no other corroboration of your memory, excepting this book? A. Yes, sir; a salesman of mine, Mr. Long, witnessed both payments. Q. How was that? A. He was with me at Desbrosses Street Ferry when twenty-five dol- lars were paid to Mr. Binder, and he stood at the window of my place of business when I handed twenty dollars to Mr. Binder on the 23d of January. Q. Did he see both payments? A. He says so yes. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover: Q. Mr. Nagle, you admit signing this note for two hundred and ninety- eight dollars and fifty-seven cents? A. Yes, sir. Q. And by that act you really .admitted at the time that you owed Mr. Binder the sum of two hundred and ninety-eight dollars and fifty-seven tents, did you not? : L...._..C P .c..5...!i.^ .7?..-..*.!: L. N o>../ &rr. i ^ '-\ ^V"*\ :..^i / -> V ...-, c..i^ \ 3 -* V X A. I thought that amount was correct, then, because I presumed the goods were all right. Q. Did you not know they were all right, Mr. Nagle? A. No, sir; I did not. Q. Then why did you sign the note? A. Because I thought the goods were all right. Q. Now, do you mean to say, Mr. Nagle, that you would have signed that note, if you had not had positive evidence that the goods were all right? A. I mean to say that I did sign that note without such positive knowledge. Q. Do you go about signing notes in that way, Mr. Nagle? A. No, sir; not generally. Especially not since then. DEFENSE RESTS. REBUTTAL. JAMES WILSON, a witness for the plaintiff, being duly sworn, testified : By Mr. Stover : Q. James, where do you reside ? A. 1132 Franklin Street, this city. Q. In whose employ are you ? A. Messrs. Bridge & Close. Q. In whose employ were you in January, 1843 ? A. I was in Mr. George Binder's employ. Q. In what capacity ? A. I was delivery clerk for Mr. Binder. Q. Do you remember' this last order of Mr. Nagle's? A. Yes, sir. Q. Did you attend to its delivery? A. Yes, sir. Q. In what way ? A. I packed the goods and gave them to the drayman to deliver to Mr. Nagle'. Q. Did Mr. Nagle ever complain about receiving the wrong goods on this occasion ? A. Not that I know of. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Willard : Q. What is your age ? A. Nineteen. Q. Then you were about sixteen when this transaction occurred ? A. Yes, sir. > .u .No Q. You would not have known if Mr. Nagle had complained about his goods, would you ? A. Not unless I heard him complain. Q. Such complaints were not usually brought to you, were they? A. No, sir. SURREBUTTAL. HENRY T. NAGLE, the defendant, recalled: By Mr. Willard : Q. You have said, in your examination-in-chief, that you complained frequently to Mr. Binder about sending you the wrong telegraph instru- ments were these complaints made verbally, or in writing ? A. Both. Q. On what occasions were they made in writing ? A. On the day I received the wrong goods. I stopped in to see Mr. Binder; and, as he was not in, I left a note on,, his desk in reference to the matter. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. Stover : Q. Who was present when you left that note ? A. I think James Wilson was. Q. You think ! Are you positive ? A. I am not positive ; it might have been someone else. Q. Did you call anyone's attention to it ? A. I think not. EVIDENCE CLOSED. CHARGE OF THE COURT. GENTLEMEN OF THE JURY This is an action of Assumpsit, brought by George Binder, the plaintiff, against Henry T. Nagle, the defendant. The plaintiff seeks in this action to recover from the defendant a sum of money which, the plaintiff claims, is due him and owing him from the defendant for merchandise delivered by the plaintiff to the defendant on the defendant's order. The principal contention between the parties in the present suit is as to the amount actually due by the defendant to the plaintiff, for the order and delivery are admitted by each. The only witnesses in this case, with the exception of James Wilson, whose testimony is unimportant, are the parties, the plaintiff and the defend- O*- o o \ I I fe ....\..\J s... b .... v . V|. !..*... J..L ant, themselves. So far as this evidence shows, there have been no other witnesses brought forward corroborative of their testimony. The law makes the parties to the suit competent witnesses. You are the judges of their credibility, and where they differ in their statements, you may determine which of them is correct. The plaintiff contends that he delivered the goods ordered, that settle- ment was made by a promissory note on which no money was paid when due at the bank nor since. The defendant, on the other hand, swears that the goods received were not those ordered, that he endeavored to return them, and that he paid forty-five dollars on the note, for which he has received no credit. Gentlemen of the Jury, here you have these statements of these two parties, and it is for you to determine which is correct. The burden rests upon the plaintiff to show you, by the weight of evidence, that his statements are true in every particular, and he must satisfy you, by the evidence, that they are so before he can recover the amount claimed. The dispute, therefore, of the plaintiff's claims, is' limited to the validity of the order and the possibility of the payments which the defendant says he made the plaintiff. The defendant claims that he settled with the plaintiff by means of this promissory note before he had examined all the goods for which the note was given in settlement, and that he afterward paid twenty dollars and twenty-five dollars, respectively, on account of that note. In relation to this note, we have to say that, in the absence of any evidence that is, if there was no other evidence in this case relating to the settlement by this note, then it would be conclusive upon this plaintiff. The presumption is, that at the time the note was given they had a just settlement of their matters, and that the note was given for the true balance known to be due on such settlement by both parties. The defendant, however, contending that the note, in point of fact, was not in true settlement of the amount he really owed the plaintiff that it was made before the goods concerned were examined the said plaintiff has a right to dispute the amount of said note, and, therefore, we have to say to you, as a matter of law, that while such a note, like a receipt in full, is generally conclusive, yet, if it may be shown that, at the settlement made when such note was given, a mistake was made that there was an error in the account then the amount on the note would not be conclusive, but it is incumbent upon the party claiming error, to show that there was an error and mistake and to show that error by satisfactory and unmistakable evidence. This note was given to and accepted by the plaintiff as a settle- ment, and, therefore, the defendant is bound by that note unless he can prove error. But, as we have already said to you, the plaintiff may explain These Court Cases bewail in March issue; five numbers in all. lOc. for each, .or 45c. for all, including tliis issue; :56c. without this issue; 27c. for three num- bers; 18c. for two numbers. the note, and, if he, by clear and satisfactory evidence, has satisfied you that there was a mistake made at the time, or that he made it under a mis- apprehension, then this paper does not bind him. Gentlemen of the Jury, I do not know that it is necessary for me to say anything further in my general charge. The only items of dispute between these parties are the two alleged payments, on account of the note given, and the value of the goods which, it is claimed by the defendant, he never ordered, tried to return, and has no use for, facts for your judgments alone to decide. Now, Gentlemen of the Jury, something has been said during the trial of this case, in relation to the pecuniary ability of the plaintiff and the defendant. I simply have to say, that whatever may be their standing and their pecuniary ability, it can not effect the rights of the one or the other in this case. You will take this case, Gentlemen of the Jury, apply to the evidence the rules of the law, as I have stated them, and render such a verdict, under your oaths, according to the evidence of the case, as your consciences will approve. AUTHOR'S NOTE. The above concludes our exercise in Court Reporting, and if the student has practiced each of the cases contained in the entire series in accordance with the rules for such practice, given elsewhere in these pages, he or she, as the case may be, will have gained a certain amount of facility in writing not possessed before, and, in addition, will have learned more respecting the natural plan of phrasing, which best comes with practicing such exercises as these Court Cases and the Business Letters. At first the student may find it more difficult to phrase than to write words separately, and may think, because the same words are found phrased on some occasions, and not in others, that there is no set rule or necessity. The explanation of the variation in phrasing is, that words should be phrased as they are sounded, that is, when words are run together by the voice, write them together, providing the simple rules for phrasing, given in our lessons, are not violated; and, where there is hesitation between uttered words, then do not phrase, as it is advisable, if possible, that phonography represent what is known as voice punctuation, on which is really based type punctuation, both of which often furnish the exact meaning of written words. A GREAT SUCCESS. I M, \ H<- l.^l I VI OF THK .M I I II PRKM1KR TY T PKWRITKR WORK* A XJEOESSITY. For some time the manufacturers of the Smith Premier typewriter have contemplated- the erection of an additional building to accommodate their rapidly increasing business. The company is now in the twenty- seventh month of its existence, having been organized in February, 1890, and at present is shipping in the sixteen thousands. AY hen the present five-story building was erected, Lyman C. Smith, the general manager, believed that he was making provisions for many years to come, but al- ready they have outgrown their present quarters, and ground has been broken for a new building adjoining the -present one. E. W. Baxter, the architect, prepared the plans, and work will be pushed as rapidly as possi- ble. It is expected that the new building will be ready for occupancy by September 1st, at the latest. The building will be 130x60 feet, and eight stories high. A part of the old Gun Works building will be utilized. The company is now fully 2,000 machines behind orders, and this fact, to- gether with the constantly increasing business makes additional room neces- sary. It is estimated that the increase of the last year over the business of 1890, was more than 100 per cent. There are employed at present between 350 and 400 men, and when the new building is completed the number will be increased to 800 or 900. The company has been in existence only twenty-seven months and is manufacturing a new machine. The company has fifteen branch offices employing more than 100 peo- ple. Between seventy and eighty salesmen are sent out from the factory and the branch offices. It has recently secured an order from the Gov- ernment for 150 machines to be used in the War department, after an expert examination. Three of the five daily newspapers in the city are using the Smith machine in their editorial rooms. The present monthly output is between 1,000 and 1,500 machines, and this number will be doubled when the new building is completed. Evening Herald, Syracuse, N. Y. ' COULDN'T REPLY TO HIS THOUGHTS. Mr. Littleton Well, it takes two to make a quarrel, so I'll shut up. Mrs. Littleton Just like you, you mean, miserable man! You'll just sit there and think ugly things! Puck. If you want the address of any- stenog- rapher iu the United States or Canada, send for How's Directory of Stenographers of the United States, handsomely bound in cloth and gold, $1.00. THE HOW PUBLISHING COMPANY, Tribune Bldg., NEW YORK, N. Y. COPYRIGHTED 1890. AiL RIGHTS RESERVED. THK Short-Hand Teacher's Companion. A handy volume of information of value to every Teacher of SHORT-HAND AND TYPE-WRITING, Containing Review Exercises, a full set (in synopsis) of Lectures to Students, together with a detailed explanation of the means by which EVEN DULL STUDENTS Are, by the Haven plan of instruction, in use at Haven Colleges, IN ONE TO THREE MONTHS, Without any previous knowledge of these arts on the Student's part, FITTED FOR POSITIONS Requiring skill in both Short-Hand and Type-writing ; minutely describing the Student's duties and pro- gress, step by step, from the taking of first lesson to graduation, with the reason for each step ; Together with much other information of value to Teachers of anv svstem. BY CURTIS HAVEN, Expert Short-hand Reporter and Type-writist, Founder of the Ha- ven Colleges of Practical Phonography and Type-writing, Author of Haven's Practical Phonography, Haven's Complete Manual of Type-writing, Etc., Etc. PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, SOIMIIEJ Showing the advantages possessed by Haven's distinct joined vowels over othe" systems in making legible, without decreasing speed, those words wherein voweh must be written, etc., etc. GRAHAM. HAVEN. LINDSLEY. CROSS. Ape \ S 1 ^ Away ^> < V ^ Iowa ^ ; ^ ^ I. PI THAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Evaporate. v^ V \ I. PITMAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Emigrant ^ -s-> - Xrt ^n Immigrant s~ -^ V^ ^ B. PITMAN. I PITMAN. HAVEN. J^oom ^ ,^ l^ i*_ Leave Lovfi Will Kave You will Kave teen PITMAN. A^ /a.. A^ ./x TV t _S HAVEN. Q ^ ^ ^ f^ T i is the ONLY system of SHORT-HAND requiring MO dictionary or phrase book: the only system available for every purpose for which PHONOGRAPHY or PENMANSHIP are em ployed; the ONLY system by which the notes of one writer, when correctly written, can be read with CERTAINTY by ANY other writer of the sys- tem; aud the onlv system which one has time to learn these busy days. INDORSED BY THE LEGAL FRATERNITY, COLLEGE * AC- ULTIES, THE PKESS AND THB PROFESSION AS T.H8 "MOST RAPIDLY READ AND WRITTEN AND EASIEST LEARNED of any system." Some students have even learned to use it and satisfactorily fill short-hand posi- tions within the brief space of one to two month? time, without any previous knowledge of any short-hand. ANYONE can learn It in three months if the directions in the book are followed. This short-hand -writing 's as legible as print when learned, and records of over 300 words a minute have been made by it. Send for circular of testimonials and free first lesson. THE COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK OF Haven's Practical Phonography Contains Self- Teaching Lessons, together with a number of Short-Hand Reading Pages, including Correspondence, Court and Convention Report- ing, with Key in common print, making this book the only treatise on Short-Hand Writing com- plete in one volume. Price, $2, free of postage to any address. Order of CURTIS HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL. Or of any teacher of the system. Whether you are Teacher. Expert, Learner, or about to learn Type- Writing no matter wkat make of machine you favor you cannot afford to be without a copy of Haven's Complete Manual OF Type-Writing A Self-Instructor for the Home Student, a Book 01 Reference for the Expert, a Guide to the Teacher, and a Text-Book for all Schools and Colleger. The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of type-writer work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial- accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of con- trast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadel- phia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading- pastern and Western dailies, and hosts of prac- tical operators. "The only complete work on Type-Writing, published. " Price, $2, free of postage, to any address. Orderof CURTIS HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL. Or of any Haven teacher. ANYONK CAN GAIN Short-Hand AND TYPE-WRITING SKILL IN THREE MONTHS BY HAVEN'S SYSTEM. NO FAILURES. No previous knowledge of either art required. Haven teachers insure all students speedy and thorough tuition in both Short-hand and Type- Writing, qualifying many students in as short a time as one to two months, and requiring no longer time than three months for even the dullest, so long as they possess a common-school education and study and practice as directed. IXSTX UCTION PEBSONALL TORE YMAIL. SPECIAL NOTICE. As there are a few teachers of other systems who, being able to qualify in three to six months an occasion ally bright student who has had pre- vious study at home, and which schools are on that score advertising that they can graduate students in three months' time (meaning of course, not all their students), it is necessary that we call attention to the difference between such misleading advertisements and our own claims, as follows: We qualify ALL students within three mouths the bright ones in much less time . Students who can by any possibility master and gain speed in three to six months by other systems, can be given such skill by the Haven system in one month. Students who require from six to twelve months to gain skill in other systems require no loager than two months by the Haven plan. Those who can NOT learn other systems under any conditions, can succeed by the Haven plan in the guaranteed three months' time. Haven's is the only system within the compre- hension of everyone. As before stated, we make NO FAILURES where our instructions are followed. Teachers who cannot meet these claims by the system they teach should investigate Haven's, and change, if they desire to be up with the times. Students not successful at other shools, as well as all persons desirous of learning in shortest possible time the fastest written and easiest read system, should correspond with thi> Haven Col- lege nearest their address. HAVEN COLLEGES OF Short-Hand and Type-writing are located in a number of principal cities. The one conducted by Mr. and Mrs. Curtis Haven in per- son is in the Tribune Build- ing, S. E.Cor. Madison and Dearborn Sts., OH 10 AGO, IL/L. Not Much. Do you see the man with the big bass drum And a drum-stick in his hand? Well, he makes more noise than all the rest, But he doesn't lead the band. Detroit Free Press. Mr. Wickwire What seemed to be the trouble next door last night? Mrs. Wickwire Oh, it was just a ques- tion as to who had the floor. He wanted to tell her of the fish he had caught, while she wanted to tell him of the smart things the baby had done while he was gone. Indianapolis Journal. A pair in a hammock Attempted to kiss, And in less than a jiffy sim aiin pspnisi jfaqj, N. T. Evening Sun. Typewriters ! New or Second hand of all makes, bought, sold, exchanged and repaired. Also rented anywhere in the country. Largest Stock in America. Not run by a Typewriter Manufacturer. Send for New Illustrated Catalogue dsscrfbing all Machines. GERBER'S SUPPLIES. NATIONAL TYPEWRITER EXCHANGE 200 LaSalle Street, CHICAGO. ADVERTISING. IF you wish to advertise anything anywhere at any time write to GEO. P. ROWEL No. 10 Spruce St., New York. L & CO., EVERY one in need of information on the subject of advertising will do well to obtain a copy of "Book for Advertisers," 368 pages, price one dollar. Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. Contains a careful compilation from the American Newspaper Directory of all the best papers and class journals; gives the circulation rating of every one, and a good deal of informa- tion about rates and other matters pertaining to the business of advertising. Address ROVVELL'S ADVERTISING BUREAU, 10 Spruce St.. N. Y. sp he O ' S>. SEND FOR CATALOGUE. 1. well < NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 185 LR 8ILLE ST., CHICAGO, Mention this advertisement TTERS MISCELLANEOUS ACTUAL BUSINESS Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, will be sent to any address by C. HAVEN, TRIBUNE BUILDING, CHICAGO. ILLINOIS, on receipt of WORDS OF ACTUAL COURT TESTIMONY Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will he sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of 10t. WORDS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN. Tribune Building, CHICAGO, ILL., on receipt of 10t. ALL THE ABOVE Letters, testimony and' convention practice, and much more, together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Herald, Philadelphia Press, Boston Herald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as " The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descriptive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert, learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor, you cannot afford to be without a copy. . Price. .$2.00 to the public but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., CHICAGO, ILL. Copyright 1891, tyy Curtis Haven. 3sro. i OF HAVEN'S SELECTIONS OF ACTUAL - COURT = TESTIMONY, Containing the Ordinary Words, Terms and Phrases used in General Court Trials Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting Practice, with Words Counted and Numbered for timing speed. 10,000 Words-Price 10 Cents. [EXPLANATION. In this printed court testimony only such omissions and changes have been made as were considered necessary to disguise the identity of the parties to the suit. Each 25 words are numbered [25], [50] and [75]; every hundred words being indicated by the black figures [1], [12], [3], etc. Such figures are not to be considered as any part of the reading matter.] MORNING SESSION. B. C. STARR, a witness for the prosecu- tion, being duly sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By U. S. Attorney Winn: Mr. Starr' [25] what is your business? A. I am an employe of Clarence Carter. Q. Do vou know S. F. Markham? A. I do. Q. What was his business at that [50] time? A. He was also employed by Mr. Carter. Q. Do you know Mr. Smith, the assist- ant general freight agent of the Minne- sota Railroad? A. I do. Q. And [75] Mr. Winters, who was the Carmine line agent? A. Yes, sir. Q. What was his official title? A. Agent of the Carmine Line and Minne- nesota Railroad. Q. And Mr. [1] Norton, did you know him? A. Yes, sir. Q. And Mr. Green? A. Yes sir. The Court. Whose employ was Nor- ton in? A. He was local agent of the [25[ Minnesota Railroad. Mr.Winn: What was Green's position? A. Contracting agent of the Minnesota Railroad. Q. What was Carter's business? A. Grain business. Q. Well, in what way? What ]5o] was he doing with grain? A. He was a shipper of grain. Q. Did he own anv elevators or operate any? A. Yes, sir. I Q. What elerators? A. He was [75] manager of the St. Paul elevator. Q. Where is that elevator located? A. Near Corwith, on the St. Paul road Q. Where is that? A. I could not say [2] exactly where it is. It is about five miles out of Chicago. Q. Will you state to the court whether at any time along in the [25] fall of iSSS you ha Clarence Carter & Co. I do not know whether they have ever been in our of- fice or not. Q. Who asked [50] you whether they had ever been in your office or not? You will oblige me by simply answering the questions I ask you. The bill [75] is sent by the elevator company to Clarence Carter & Co. for what? A. One of them seems to be for storage on some oats and (92) the other also appears to be for storage on oats. Q. Now can you tell me from anything that appears on those bills either face or (25) the back upon what oats that ' storage was for? A. I do not know from these bills. Q. From the face or back I said? The Court: (50) From anything that is on the bills can you tell? A. There is a notation on the bottom of one of them M. R. cars, no (75) numbers or anything to correspond with them, but there seems to be some numbers on the back. I suppose the numbers refer to loads in (93) Carmine Line cars. Q. Then it is three cars 15646, 18263, 4,399 and you will find receipted (25) there on the back of the other some fig- ures? A. On the back of the other bill ness of the Carmine Line company was exercised and conducted by the (97) Minnesota Railroad Company. It is simply a freight line of that companv. Mr. White: That you will have to prove. Mr. Winn: I intend to (25) try to prove all that. (To witness) I will show you this bill and ask you whether these cars were loaded from the Peoria Railroad? (50) Mr. White: I understand that the question is as to whether he has exam- ined his records. A. Yes, sir. Mr. Winn: That is your answer? A. Yes, (75) sir. Q. Do you keep a record of all the grain that is loaded in cars out of eleva- tors? A. Yes, sir. Q. Who keeps that record? A. It (98) is kept in my office. Q. What is your office? A. The grain inspection office of the State. Q. I will ask you to state for what purpose (25) this record is kept? A. The record is made for the purpose of show- ing certificates of the work done by the office and for the date (50) for the collec- tion of fees for doing the work, and is kept for the information of the public. Q. Is that a record that is required (75) by law to be kept? A. I am not sure whether or not there is any legal re- quirement. It is necessary in the course of our (99) business to keep it. The Court: You do keep such a re- cord? A. Yes, sir. Mr. Winn: You have made examina- tion. State what you know about (25) this. Objected to on the ground that it has not been shown that it is a record to be kept by law; that it is (50) not shown that he kept the record himself. The Court: He can state the manner in which it is done. A. I have the original reports (75) made byt>ur inspec- tors. The Court: Your record is made up by reports of deputy inspectors? A. Yes, sir. Q. And is copied bv vourself or your (lOO)clerks? A. My clerks. Q. You have brought to the court the reports of those inspectors? A. Yes, sir. Adjourned. (10,017 words) fourteen pages of court testimony represent a supplement to Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting, the only complete work on typewriting. Price, $2. cars 35204, figure 32 [50] opposite; 13556, 32 opposite; 11145,30430,854532 oppo- site; 10459, [75] 32 opposite. Q. What do those figures opposite in- dicate? A. The weight of the cars, 1 suppose. Q. 32,000 pounds? A. Yes, sir. Q. I will ask you (94) what the first figures represent? A. They appear to represent car numbers. Q. Will you tell to the Court then whether that is not a bill for (25) storage upon the oats in those various cars? A. It is. Q. Is that the ordinary way in which the elevator company the Minnesota elevator company make [50] out their bills? A. It appears so from that bill. I am not familiar with storage bills. Q. Who in Mr. Carter's employ is familiar with it? [75] A. There is a storage man in every office who attends to such things. CROSS EXAMINATION. By Mr. English: Do vou know of your own knowledge (95) what they are? A. No, sir. Q. Know anything about where they purport to get their information that is, of vour o\vn knowledge? A. No, sir. Q Know who (25) put the figures on those papers? A. No, sir. Q. You simply interpret then what it shows on the face? A. Yes, sir. P. B. FRANKS, being duly (50) sworn, testified as follows: DIRECT EXAMINATION. By Mr. Winn: What is your business, Mr." Franks? A. I am chief inspector of grain. Q. I will ask you (75) to state whether as chief inspector of grain you have ex- amined the records of your office for the purpose of determining what cars were loaded (96) whether cars numbered 35,204, 10,454, 12,877, 8,545, 13,556, (25) 11,145, cars 4,399, 15,646, 18,263 were? The Court: Of what road are they? (50) Mr. Winn: This is the Minnesota Railroad, Carmine Line cars. Mr. White: Do you assume that the Carmine Line cars are Minnesota Rail- road cars? Mr. Winn: Yes, sir; I certainly assume that the Carmine Line cars and the busi- 100 MISCELLANEOUS ACTUAL BUSINES S Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting Practice, with words counted and numbered for timing speed, like above testimony, will be sent by C. HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Building, Chicago, Illinois, on receipt of SO:M::E Showing the advantages possessed by Haven's distinct joined vowels over other systems in making legible^ without decreasing speed, those words wherein vo\vt.!s must be written, etc., etc. GRAHAM. HAVEN. LINDSLEY CROS3. Ape \ V 1 ^x? Away ^ d e^ ^ Iowa ^\ J ^ ^ I. PITMAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Evaporate. ^ V \ 1 I. PITMAN., GRAHAM. HAVEN. Emigrant ^, ^ j~* Immigrant ^, ^ _^ B. PITMAN, I PITMAN. HAVEN. Ivooin i -. ^-^ l^s ^ ^r Leave Love. Will Kave You will Kave teen PITMAM n^ /"I (\- 7v -/ v ^^ HAVEN f~^ / N Y^\ /^ T l 1 IN PREPARATION. es Copyrighted 1890. All Rights Reserved THE Short-Hand Teacher's Companion. A handy volume of information of value to every Teacher of SHORT-HAND AND TYPE-WRITING, Containing Review Exercises, a full set (in synopsis) of Lectures to .Students, together with a detailed explanation of the means by which EVEN DULL STUDENTS Are, by the Haven plan of instruction, in use at Haven Colleges, IN ONE TO THREE MONTHS, Without any previous knowledge of these arts on the Student's part, FITTED FOR POSITIONS Requiring skill in both Short-Hand and Type-writing ; minutely describing the Student's duties and pro- gress, step by step, from the taking of first lesson to graduation, with the reason for each step ; Together with much other information of value to Teachers of anv svstem. BY CURTIS HAVEN, Expert Short-hand Reporter and Type-writist, Founder of the Ha- ven Colleges of Practical Phonography and Type-writing, Author of Haven's Practical Phonography, Haven's Complete Manual of Type-writing, Ktc., Etc. T. " *i>Ki.rruA AND CHICAGO: PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR. Copyright IM'1. by Curtis Havi-u. P^jOLlXEIRIHILET 3STo. 1 OF HAVEN'S SELECTIONS OF ACTUAL CONVENTION PROCEEDINGS, Containing the Ordinary Words, Terms and Phrases used in General Public Assem- blies, Oratory, Etc. Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words Counted and Numbered for timing speed. 1O.OOO NA/ords Rrioe, 1Oc. (Explanation: Every twenty-five words are marked [25], [50] or [75] and every hundred words are shown by black figures, [1], [2], [3], etc., representing 100, 200, 300, etc., respectively. Such figures are not to be read as part of the proceedings.) Meeting called to order at 8:15 p. m. President VanShaack: In calling the Convention to order, I will detain you but a moment [25] while expressing the great pleasure which I experience in meeting with you once more face to face, and permit me to add that I trust [50] there will be a full and free discussion of every subject which comes before this Association and upon which there is any difference of opinion. [75] It has been my experience, gentle- men, as well as that of others who have occupied this chair, that after adjournment some gentleman has remarked "that [1] he did not think it good policy" though we never had the pleasure of hearing his voice during the discussion. We wish a free discussion [25] and a full one as to the expediency of every move we make. There are gentlemen on this floor who are able to teach us [50] much, but their in- herent modesty and the unsteadiness of their legs the infirmities which the speaker himself experiences prevent us hearing from them as we [75] should. Let there be a reform in this regard. If there are any gentlemen present representing any of our sister associations they will kindly send [U] their names to the chair. The first order of business, gentlemen, is the roll call. Mr. J. M. Peters I move that the calling of [25] roll be dispensed with until a later session; many of the members are absent as yet. [It was so ordered.] The President It is in [50] order to hear from the representatives of the different Associations. I see that the A. P. A. have appointed the following named gentlemen as delegates: [75] Mr. Wm. Thompson, Mr. John A. Milburn, Mr. I). M. R. Culbreth. None of those gentlemen responding, we would lik*|D hKir from the Ohio [3] State Association, Mr' J. N. Reed, of Toledo, or Mr. C. E.^B^ of Columbiana, or from the Mass. Association, Mr. J. W. Colcord, Mr. [25] E- WaWb Cutler or Mr. F. E. Carter. I see Mr. Carter is present. Mr. Carter I am sure some of those men are on [50] hand to do their duty. It was expected that the Mass. State Association would send a retail member of their Asso- ciation instead of being represented [75[ by a member of the National Association. That member will not be here until to-morrow, and will therefore have to present his case later on. [-tj He had some remarks which he wished particularly to make. The President I see the New Jersey Association has appointed the following as delegates: Mr. [25] Henry O. Ryerson, Alfred S. Marshall and Wm. N. Townley. There being none of them present, if any person is here representing any sister Asso- ciations [50] I trust he will comply with the wish of the Chair by forwarding his name to us at once. Mr. M. N. Kline It has [75] usually been my misfortune to misrepresent the Penn. Pharmaceutical Association on the floor of this convention, but this year I happen to know that we [o] have present a proper and real representative in Mr. J. B. Duble, of Williamsport, Pa. Mr. Duble Mr. President and gentlemen of the Association, I [25] have the honor to represent the Penn. State Pharmaceutical Association, although T think that friend Kline has made a mistake when he speaks slightly of [50] the feeling \ve have always experienced to have him represent us. I had hoped that before I had presented my- self and my claims, that we [75] could hear from the A. P. A.; whom we recognize as the parent organization of the retail trade of this country. I am here Mr. [<5] Chair- man, I presume, under peculiar circumstances. I had expected when I came, to enjoy what I had always heard and what is generally known as [2o] the courtesy and kind- ness usually shown our representatives. I came expecting a good time, and I expect to have it, but unfortunately I am sent [50] here this time on a business mission and I feel like acting loyal to the organization sending me. I propose to bring before this association [To] a question, not at all new to you, and yet one in which we claim the retailer to be directly interested and also the wholesaler, [7] and at the proper time and in the proper place I should like very much, so far as the State of Penn. is concerned and [25 J as being her representative, to give you whatever thoughts I might have upon this question. It is a well known fact that for years the [50] retail trade has been laboring under a tremendous burden. And as the" National Organiza- tion is interested in our welfare as retailers, we come to you [75] because we feel naturally that you are our friends. This, however, is not the proper time and for the present I am very glad for [8] your attention. President VanShaack Mr. Horace Benton, will you be kind enough to respond. Mr. Benton It is so long since I have been [25] here that I am not in the spirit to respond. I came here to catch the spirit. I dropped out and dropped behind. I came [50] here to catch up. I am very glad that the retailers are in touch with the wholesalers of the United States. I remember when this [75] Association began, that we had, to a certain extent, the jealousy of the retailers. It was supposed then that the wholesale drug association intended to [i)] freeze out the retailers of the United States. That belief has long since passed away, and now in these meetings the retail- ers are welcome and [25] they come here and tell you that they look on the whole- sale association of this country as their warm friends. This I believe, is a [50] truth. I think we all in our hearts respond to this that we are the friends of the retailers. The President I notice with much [75] pleasure that we have with us to-night the President of the Proprietors' Association, Dr. R. V. Pierce, of Buffalo, and would be very glad to [1O] hear from the Doctor. Dr. Pierce Mr. President, the Proprietors' Association have, I believe, a represent- ative appointed to represent them at this meeting, but, inasmuch [25] as I have been called upon to respond for the Association I would say, that the Proprietors' Associa- tion are glad to be here to meet [50] with you on this occasion, and the}- have great cause for thankfulness, especially during the past year, for the valuable services ren- dered them by this [75] association and its representative, through their Committee on Legislation. Mr. Jones of Philadelphia, I believe is the Chairman, and Mr. Kline and several other gentlemen [11] the able representatives. Certain matters thought to be inimical to the proprietary interest were brought forward for legislative action, and those gentlemen volunteered very promptly [25] to fight the battles, . which it was thought they could do better than the proprietors could do themselves. Our as- sociation is in a very flourishing [50] condition, so far as numbers are concerned, having added very largely thereto during the past year. They feel that their inter- ests are identical with your [75] own in many respects, and they are also aware that there are many interests wherein the retail dealers are interested as well, and it does [1 ] not require very much stress of the imagination to divine the evil which the gentleman from Pennsylvania has briefly alluded to here this evening. \Ve, [25] as proprietors, only hope that in the combined wisdom of the various associations auxiliary to the National Wholesale Druggists' Association, some plan will be devised [50] whereby this growing evil may be obliterated. Thanking you for your kind consideration, I will not take up the time of the Association further at [75] present. The President I will call upon Mr. J. C. Eliel to respond. Mr. Eliel Mr. President and gentlemen, if there is one thing more [13] than another that would bring about a movement in the right direction, it seems to me to be the encouraging words that Dr. Pierce has [25] just uttered. I believe we all recognize the evils to which the gentleman from Penn. refers. I believe we are all suffering from the same [50] evil; I believe that many of us have tried honestly to devise some plan that would overcome it, and I want to re-echo the words [75] of Dr. Pierce, that I trust the combined wisdom of these associations may find some way in which this can be affected. I kiiow that [14] in our own section of country we are all suffering from that great and growing evil, and I also know that as yet we have ['25] found no way to curtail or hinder its growth. It seems to me that the two great questions which confront our association today are the [50] cutter and the jobber, the member of our association who persists not only in making no profit for himself, but who, like the dog in [75] the manger, objects to his neighbor making a profit. I am one of those who leaves his desk and comes here year after year not [15] mere- ly to utter words that sound well, but who comes here for a purpose. That is, in the nature of our business we can subserve [25] our business and interests better by com- ing together upon these annual occasions than we can individually at our desks at home, and I believe most [50] earnestly that we should not get together here without each one of us saying to himself and to his neighbor, "let some good come out [75] of this meeting; let us at each annual meeting eradicate some evil, some abuse, that has crept into our business," then we can all go [16] home feeling that our time has not been lost. If we get together here merely to 'hear each other talk or for social amusement and [25] then go home to cut each other's throats, I ask you what are we here for? I will not take up more time, and thank [50] you Mr. President for the opportunity of saying a \vord. The President I hold in my hand a certificate from the Mass. Pharmaceutical As- sociation, in [75] which it announces that our esteemed friend, E. Waldo Cutler is one of the delegates. We never knew of an instance before when he shirked [17] his duty, and he did not respond when \ve called upon Massachusetts. Mr. Cutler Mr. President, this is the first intimation that I have [25] of the honor, and am therefore not prepared to respond. The President I understand that we have representatives here from the Minn. State Pharmaceutical Association, Mr. [50] J. P. Allen and Mr. H. G. Webster. I see ,Mr. Allen is present. We would be glad to have him come forward and let [75] us look at him, hear him and welcome him. Mr. Allen Mr. President, Mr. Webster and myself have come here to represent the Minn. State [18] Pharmaceutical Association, and while thanking you for the kindness extended to us will not detain you with any lengthy remarks tonight, but will be happy [25] to say at the proper time, a few words touching upon a matter which we believe is for the mutual advantage of the manufacturers, the [50] whole- sale druggists and the retail druggists. At the proper time we will be pleased to present it. The President This would seem at opportune time. [75.] Mr. Allen We are hardly prepared to-night, Mr. President. The President Mr. Duble, could we not hear from you this evening on the sub- ject you [It)] spoke of? This is probably as good an opportunity as any. Mr. Duble I am perfectly willing to abide by the rules of this asssociation, [25] and I want to preface whatever I may say, by saying that whatever evils I may speak about I have no particular plan to suggest [50] as a remedy. I simply thought it would be possible for this association in its wisdom to appoint a committee on this question, and if [75] that committee were appointed, I would much prefer presenting our views to it. However, I am perfectly satisfied, if it is the wish of the [2O] con- vention, to state all I propose stating to that committee right here. Mr. President I think probably that would be the best course to pursue, [25] and then if any member should choose to refer the matter to one of our standing com- mittees, it would be quite in order. I do [50] not know of any opportunity better than the present, to lay the matter before the entire association; then they would better understand matters when the [75] committee make their report. Mr. Duble Mr. President and gentlemen: I am sorry that what I may have to say and the manner in which [21] I will say it, would hardly entitle me to such a con- spicuous position, but I desire to say that at the last meeting of the [25] Pennsyl- vania Pharmacutical Association, the question of cut prices probably you may have heard of that before was very fully discussed and the fact was shown [50] conclu- sively that for the last few years the retail trade has suffered very much from this thing, I want to say here that so far [75] as I am concerned personally, I cannot enter into the spirit of the thing, as I should like to do, from the fact that in [22] our own town we do not suffer from such consequences. It started out in our town at one time but we fought fire with fire [25] we cut the cutter until he was unable to continue the cutting any longer. But unfortunately that is not the condition of affairs throughout our [50] state, and in fact throughout the country on the contra- ry, the evil instead of reducing is gradually growing. At this meeting of our associa- tion it [75] was insisted upon, that notwithstanding the fact that that association as a matter of courtesy had already been ably represented here by members of the [2 J?] National Association, yet it was insisted upon that some one should be sent to repre- sent the retail dealers, and unfortunately for them I think I [115] was the party select- ed; and I am here before you to-night to prove loyal to my friends, and whatever in that spirit I may say [50] here to-night acknowledging the fact that I am simply heard out of courtesy of this association whatever I may say, while I may speak plainly, [75] I trust you will take it in that light. I remember some few years ago when the wholesale trade of this country was suffering from [24] the same cause. I remember the time when there were many wholesale pharmacists who had bank- ruptcy staring them in the face, from the simple fact [25] that a large proportion of the goods that they sold, were obliged to be sold without any profit*whatever. I think that you will agree [50] with me that such was the case'before, in your wisdom Mr. President and gentlemen, you perfected a plan by which you are secured at [75] least a fair profit for the goods you sell in that line. Now if it can be done among wholesalers, I ask you in all [2o] justice and in all reason, why cannot it be done among the retailers? Now, I want to show you it has been an expression that [25] I have heard made that the retailers are not the only ones that will suffer from this curse. No man can afford to do business [50 J and sell goods without realizing at least a sufficient profit from the goods to pay for making the sale. You will admit with nit- that [75] at least fifty or sixty per cent, of the gflods that are sold by the retailers to- day in a great number of localities are sold [26] without any profit. What is to be the result when I have to conduct the sale of one-half the goods without a profit? If [25] I have a certain line of goods which I sell without any profit, the sooner I elimi- nate those articles from my business, the better for [50] me. When I was appointed to this convention I made it a point to ask a number of the retailers in our state what they [75] would eventually do, when we found that it was absolutely impossible to bring about any change in this matter. With scarcely a single exception, that [27] \vastheviewthat was taken of it. Now, Mr. President and gentlemen, if such a state of affairs should be brought about by this [25] cutting business, I ask you in all reason if the wholesalers will not have to take their share of the losses. We can- not sell goods [50] without realizing a profit if we do not buy goods you cannot sell them. Then I would like to ask the manufacturers of proprietary preparations [75] if the drug stores of this country do not handle their goods, whether in their judg- ment they would have the same sale for them in [28] the dry goods and the notion stores and in the boot and shoe stores. The patent medicine business of this country, Mr. President and gentlemen, [25] is not of the dry goods and notion store creation. I want to say with all justice to the gentlemen who are here to represent [50] the proprietary interests of this country that we as retail pharmacists do not think the dry goods stores are necessary to the sale of proprietary [75] medicines. We do not think they are necessary. The proprietors have advertised them, and kn< what is a fact, that those preparations which were most [29] widely advt-v were the most likely to be called for we have bought them and sold them. The demand for them has been made through [25] the drug stores. It has not been through the dry goods stores. And just in proportion to the amount of business done by proprietors and [50] the amount of advertising just in the proportion ha\ number of drug stores also increased. Where we had 1,000 to 2,000 or [75] 3 and sometimes 4,000 or 5,000 inhabitants, we have now almost one drug store to every thousand population. This has been simply [3O] brought about by this one- thing the increase of preparations. Why, I remember when I was an appn that'a little case about ten feet [25] in length would hold all the proprietary pn tions in the country to-day it takes one-half an ordinary pharmacy to hold them all. These things [50] have to be kept now though they are sold without a profit. The drug stores are the place to keep them. And they do it. [75] But I want to see if something cannot be done. I want to go back to the Pennsylvania Pharmaceutical Association feeling that I have not [31] been here for no purpose. I want to go back there to tell them one thing or the other. Either to say that there is [25] no question about it ; that something can be done. Or else to say to them that there is no use trying to kick against the [50] pricks; you must submit to it or eliminate it from your business. It is not my business to say how it can be done. I [75] can sub- mit no plan. But I want to ask one question. If there are any manufacturers of pro- prietary medicines in this hall I want to [3ii] ask this one question of them: Sup- pose, for instance, that you knew for a certainty that the sale of your goods at certain low prices ['25] was an injury or rather an injury to their sales to other sales would not you stop it? I will warrant you would. Cases are [50] on record where goods are sold just in that way. I can mention one business house Mr. Geo. J. Seabury You can put our house [75] in there. Mr. Duble It can be done, gentlemen, if you desire to do it. There is no question about that. But, we want the [33] wholesale men and the manufacturers of pro- prietary preparations to work together in this matter. \Ve want to accomplish something or else we want to know [25] that we cannot. I want to say right here while I am on the floor, and I think it is a very important thing, in [50] my own city there is not a single article sold below the regular prices. To-day you can trav- erse the city from beginning to end, and [75] you will not find a secret preparation on sale by any druggist below the regular prices not one. (Applause). It is not a question whether [3-t] the manufacturers of each preparation are doing a business that justifies their expenditures or not and that man who is wise will look still fur- ther ['25] than simply as to whether his advertising is bringing in the required result. It is not what they are doing so much as it is [50] what they might do. The biggest losers are the cutters. Go into any establishment that does a cutting business and you will find the preparations [75] they are offering are those known to the public. That is a question that I simply want to bring more particularly to the manufacturers of [35] patent proprietary preparations. I feel that while I could go on still further, yet I see that the chairman of my committee is here and [25] I will give way to him. Mr. Allen Mr. President and gentlemen : I am glad as a delegate of the Minne- sota Pharmaceutical Association, to confirm [50] all that the gentleman has said. I have been in a position to look into the subject, and as far as I can gather they [75] are the sentiments of the entire pharmacists of this country. As I said to you a few minutes ago, we have a plan that we [36] can offer the convention, but must ask you to have the kindness to excuse us till to-morrow, because it is not here. I have sent [25] for it. It is a definite plan. The President Mr. Lord, will you respond to Mr. Duble's remarks? Mr. Thomas Lord I am not prepared [50] to respond fully, but I am very much in sympathy with what he has said on the subject, and I believe from my own experi- ence [75] and observation, ever since the formation of the National Wholesale Drug- gists Association, that there has been adopted a prominent feeling in this direction. I know [37] that for many years the committee which had in mind a change, felt the necessity for relief from the condition which is referred to by [25] the gentleman who has just spoken, and in every single case where the proprietors were approached in reference to the matter that has been adopted [50] known as the rebate contract plan that in every case the committee presented, recommended, urged and entreated that the necessities of the retail dealers be [75] consulted. In testimony of this we can refer to every member of the proprietors' association that was approached and who entered into the rebate plan. [38] Iwould say further, not having expected to be called upon and having no arrangements of thought, it seems to me that if the retail [25] druggists will formulate a plan that is reasonable and proper and practicable, they will find a very strong backing on the part of the members [50] of the National Wholesale Druggists' Association to carry it through and make it a power for good to them as well as ourselves. We are [75] appreciative of the fact that the retail drug- gists are our friends and customers and we want to protect them as far as possible, and I [3i>] believe it has been the feeling and spirit and purpose of this association ever since its commencement, to hold this in mind, and I know, [25] from personal observation and experience, that practically it has been attempted to be carried out; but we would say to the retail gentlemen that if [50] they will present a feasible and practicable plan, that I think we will all be very happy indeed to put our shoulders to the plan [75] and get under the curtain and help lift it up. (Applause.) The President Gentlemen, Mr. Thompson of Washington, is present. We would be glad to [4O] hear from him upon the subject. Mr. Wm. H. Thompson Mr. President and gentlemen of the Wholesale Druggists' Association: Coming in late, I have not [25] been able to catch the whole drift of the gentlemen who have preceded me, but from what I understand, the matter before you is for [50] some protection to the retail druggist. Of course we are very glad to have this matter under consideration. We are here as a delegation representing [75] the American Pharmaceutical Association with instructions to co-operate with this association and with that of the manufacturers in any measure that )-ou may suggest or [41] undertake, looking towards the elevation of the standards of the qualities of medicines, to co-operate w T ith yon in any thing that looks toward improvement in [25] methods of doing business; to assist in any way possible to correct what is now complained of by all the retailers at least, as a [50] very serious evil. It has been suggested by the gentleman who just spoke on the other side that some plan should come from the retailers, [To] that you are perfectly willing to endorse or recommend or aid us in any plan we may suggest; but I suggest to you, gentlemen, it [412] is not in our power to put such a plan in operation, that the remedy must come from the source, that the manufacturers of proprietary [25] medicines have the complete con- trol of that, and it is for them to suggest a remedy for the evil complained of. We stand ready and [50] willing to co-operate with this or any other association with any plan that may be proposed. Mr. George J. Seabury Mr. President, I may disagree (75) with some of our emi- nent speakers in this association, but I think before we are many years older, we will have to adopt some plan [43] similar to that of the American Pharmaceutical Asso- ciation, whereby we will be obliged to do our work by sections. I have spoken of this method [25] before. I do not believe this is the proper time to bring up this subject. We all have diverse opinions Mr. President. I think it [50] should be treated in sessions to come, and that now we should be prepared to hear the address of our worthy president and officers instead [75] of allowing the general business to interfere, and before we disperse from this meeting I shall bring before the associa- tion a resolution to that effect, [44] because I believe we waste time. We have done it ever since I have been a member of this association, and for that reason we [25] .are having questions sprung upon us here, at the beginning of our meetings, that will take many hours to debate. I disagree w r ith our friend, [50] Mr. Thompson, that our remedy must come from above. My remedy has always been from the bot- tomfrom the retailer. When they will stand together [75] as the wholesalers do, then they will dictate and tell you what you shall and must not do. And not only that. The plan which [45] Mr. Duble wants is also an honest one and a scientific one and that is, that every manufacturer in this country that manufactures an arti- cle [25] of genuine merit be protected against the sale of substitutions, and I am in hopes to see them driving the wholesalers to do the same [50] thing. That is one reason I did not go to Indianapolis last year. I would have given you something on substitution if I had. We [75J have gentlemen who come here year after year who come here with platitudes and stand up here and plead for a straight-forward practice, and [46] know they do not practice it. I have got the proofs against them. They are worse substitutors than even the retailers. I have tried to [25] keep ourselves like a family for years, but I guess a good many of you who would not speak to me when you meet me, [50] find that I am not afraid to speak the truth nevertheless. I state it now : The wholesale druggists are just as largely responsible for substitution [75] as the retailers that you want to help to gain a profit. Now, that is about the size of this whole discussion, and I would [47] like to have one of our sections take and discuss this straight. I will give you some knowledge internally, and you may depend upon it [25] that every statement I will make I will prove. I never yet made a statement that I could not prove, and therefore I think the [50] time will come when one of these sessions will be set aside for this business because it involves the wholesaler, the manufacturer and the retailer. [75] The time is coming when you \\ .11 not be able to collect your debts from your customers you will not have money enough to hold [48] them out of bankruptcy. I can see that very well. There is many a wholesale druggist to-day that is carrying fifty per cent, of his [25] customers, including those in New York, Brooklyn, Boston, Philadelphia, and other cities, and I think it is a question that is not to "be sniffed [50] at by anybody, not even by the manufacturer or the retailer ; and if they will stand together in a solid phalanx they can get fair [75] prices, and they will say to you, "You must not sell the dry goods men or other tradesmen a dollars' worth of these goods." I [4D] have not done it on principle and I will not do it so long as I live. That is one reason I object to this [25j gentleman's plan. They go to work and boycott the honest manufacturers. Sup- posing yon place ray goods in the hands of a dry -goods man in [50] St. Paul. Any- body knows I will not sell to a dry goods man. The dry goods business can take care of itself. How do you [75] know they cannot get hold of these- goods ? Is that any reas- on I should boycott anybody else ? \ou do not do justice to the honest [5O] manu- facturer. If we are to have any reforms, let us do it if we can by a tripartite scheme manufacturers, retailers, wholesalers. I will do [25] it for one. You will have shorter bills to pay. You won't have to wait six months for your money. That is why the retail [50] trade is in such a miserable condition to-day financially. Mr. Allen As the gentleman has seen fit to refer to our plan, I will simply [75] say that it is not our time to discuss it yet, and we will refrain from making any re- marks from the fact that our plan [51] has not been submitted. We will reply to that after it is submitted. Mr. M. N. Kline Mr. Chairman, I desire to say that the [25] suggestion made by our friend Mr. Seabury in reference to sections is not only a very good one, but one which has been in successful [50] operation in this association for many years, and I think anyone who comes to our meetings will testify that our business is done expedi- tiously. We [75] have a committee on every subject which has commonly come be- fore this body, and I think that those committees have generally considered, digested and brought [52] before the association everything of this nature which the associa- tion cared to consider. Now, we have a committee on this subject under discussion, the Committee [25] on Proprietary Goods, and unfortunately I happen to be at this time its chairman, and I think we can save a great deal of time [50] by having any propositions that might be brought before that committee given it first, and after it is passed upon by that committee to have [75] it brought before this association. I have prepared, as you probably have anticipated, a report of that committee, and I think I have not been [53] asleep during the year, as to what has been going on and what has developed in connection with this subject, and I hope you will [25] say when this report is brought to your notice, that I will have covered all the questions. I think we can get along more expeditiously [50] and very much more to their taste and comfort, if these matters were submitted to the proper committees and are thus passed to this association. [75]. That is what I call doing our business through sections, or, as we call it, through committees. Mr. Seabury Mr. President, I will make this [54] statement which I made before. You remember, as we all do, that these reports are read by the different chairmen, then reported to the Board [25] of Control. The best time to debate reports of the chair- man is right here when everybody is primed with the subject and has ideas on [50] it, instead of debating it over twice. That is the only point I have made. Mr. Eliel I think there is a way to do [75] these things and do them properly. We must concede that to undertake to discuss a question like this at the opening of a convention is [55] improper. We have a committee on proprietary goods, a very able committee having a very able chairman, having done in the past much yeoman- work for [25] the association, and I think it only proper for these various associations to present their plans to that committee and have them debated in committee, [50] and brought to us in their proper order. Certainly these things should not be dis- cussed ahead of that report. I have just this one suggestion [75] to make that is that after that course has been pursued, if it is the will of this convention, that the gentlemen whom we have [56] here representing the various associations will be given not only the courtesy of the floor, but given also free and full permission to meet here [25] ever}' day and help us discuss these questions. They are practical men. They have come here with ideas on these subjects. If we have objections, [55 1 then they ought to hear our side of the question, when they can go home feeling that we have worked together with them, whatever the [75] result may be. I move you, Mr. Chairman, that this matter take its proper course and be referred to the committee on proprietary remedies. Seconded [57] and so ordered. On motion, adjourned until next morning at 10 o'clock. SECOND DAY MORNING SESSION. The Convention was called to order by the President [25] at 10:25, a. m. The secretary called the roll of the active Membership. The President Gentlemen, we have a communication from the Delaware [50] State Pharmaceutical Society. The Secretary will please read it, and, if there is no objection, it will be referred to the Committee on Proprietary Articles. [75] REPORT OF COMMITTEE APPOINTED TO EXAMINE THE "FRENCH'S PLAN" FOR THE SALE OF PROPRIETARY MEDICINES. WILMINGTON. DEL., Sept. IGth, isoo. Mr. President and Gentlemen, [58] N. W. D. A. Resolved, That this committee commend to the attention of the National Wholesale Druggists' Association, and the Association of Manufacturers and dealers [25] in Pro- prietary articles of the United States, a consideration of the so-called "French's plan," for the sale of Proprietary Medicines; that while we do [50] not endorse the plan in its entirety, we feel that it possesses some good features that can be incorporated in a final plan for the [75] amelioration of the retail druggist. We, moreover, strongly demand the adoption of some plan for this purpose. O. C. SPEAR. Z. JAMES BELT. N. DANFORTH.[5i>] J. M. HARVEY. E. E. BOSTICK. Committee. There being no objection, the communication was referred to the Committee on Proprietary articles. The President Gentlemen, I [25] have pleasure in announcing that Mr. John A. Dadd, of Milwaukee, Wis., is a delegate from the Wisconsin State Pharmaceutical Association. We will be glad [50] to have Mr. Dadd, who I see is present, step forward and address the association. Mr. Dadd Although not a man of many words, nor [75] accustomed to speak in public, still I am very happy to be here as a representative of the Wisconsin State As- sociation. Being familiar with the [6O] interests of the retailer, and having been myself some 22 years a jobber, as well as for the past 19 years a retailer, I [25] un- derstand the difficulties of both sides of the question. I trust this question will be handled with moderation and w r ith satisfaction to both sides, and [50] knowing as I do, a large number of the wholesalers, I have no doubt full justice will be done to the interests of the retailers [75] as far as lies in your power. Gentlemen, I thank you The President Mr. Hinchman, of Detroit, will kindly reply to the remarks of the [61] gentleman from Wisconsin, Mr. Dadd. Mr. Hinchman I am very happy to respond to the gentleman from Wisconsin. I can say little in obedience to [25] your request, but I can say somewhat more of Michigan than I can of Wisconsin. I attended the meeting of the Michigan Associ- ation. There was [50] quite an enthusiastic and pleasant gathering. The matters under discussion were similar to those which engage the attention of other associ- ations. The "cutting" business was [75] discussed, and the solution of that question seemed as difficult with them as with us, if not more difficult. They did not appear to have [62]faith in the Wholesale Association's stand in the matter, and I also, in a measure, admit my incredulity in that direction. Another matter of some [25] discus- sion before that association was the difficulty of disposing of excess stock that had accu- mulated, and for which there was no sale. Their first impression [50] was that the wholesalers could relieve them of the excess of stock, but that solution of the ques- tion was found most difficult. It was suggested [75] that their own salvation de- manded that the goods be advertised, but their funds were not sufficient for that pur- pose. Finally, the matter was referred to [63] a committee. Your delegate to that association very politely invited them to send a delegate to this meeting, but their action with respect to that [25] I did cot wait to hear. I presume, however, that they failed to act upon it; and therefore, as a member of that association, I [50] take the liberty of announcing myself as a delegate from the Michigan Retail Association, as well as being a member of this. The President We [75] have with us to-day Mr. L. F. Chalen, who represents the Louisiana Pharmaceutical Association, as w r ell as the New Orleans Association. I should be pleased [64] to have the gentleman step forward and address the associa- tion. Mr. Chalen Mr. President, as the representative of the Louisiana and New Orleans Pharmaceutical Association, [25] I ought to say a few words expressive of our feelings and views relative to the cutting of prices of proprietary medicines, and the sale [50] of them by dry good stores and bazaars, for almost no price, but merely for the purpose of advertising. And in the first place, I [75] desire to say, that I experi- ence no ordinary ^pleasure in finding myself in the company of so many distinguished gentlemen composing the U. S. Association [65] of manufacturers and dealers in Proprietary Articles, the National Wholesale Druggists' Association and the many members of the different Pharmaceutical Associations of the I". S. [25] I feel, in ad- dition to the usual sentiments of friendship inspired by congeniality of tastes, and mutual business relations for many here present, that esteem [50] which is due to them, not only as successful business men, but for men of science as well. The thriving pharmacist must be not only [75] a good business man but a scholar and chemist besides; he is admitted into the secret chambers of Nature and has revealed to him the [OO] causes of the wonderful changes of substances which result from molecular attractions and repulsions. Upon his knowledge and skill depends the health and lives of [25] his fellow-men, and therefore the business of pharmacy holds a high place in the minds of all appreciative persons. I have been delegated, gentle- men [50] of the Association of Manufacturers and Dealers in Proprietary Articles and the National Wholesale Druggists' Association, by my colleagues of Louisiana, to say to you [75] all that the retail druggists of Louisiana re-echo the sentiments contained in the joint address of the Ramsey county Pharmaceutical Association and the Minne- apolis Pharmaceutical [67] Association. We denounce the invasion of our business by men who almost give away proprietary medicines, perfumery and proprietary arti- cles, only for the sake of [25] advertising and drawing customers to purchase their dry goods, toys and baby carriages, thus using the legitimate business of pharmacy as a pole to shake [50] down the persimmons of their own fortune this we consider degrading to the character of our business and highly improper on its face, not less [75] so than it would be for the retail druggist to sell gentlemen's neckties and ladies' hose. But we would say little about the mere external [68] impropriety of the thing were it not for the internal injustice it works upon us. To some retail drug- gists the sale of these articles is [25] of no little importance, in healthy localities and other localities at healthy periods, the sale of them often help to fill up the void in [50] the prescription business, and it is unjust that they who serve as the medium of introducing these articles to the public by commending them orally [75] or by printed bills, should not only be deprived of their benefits, but made the laughing stock of cutters in the dry goods stores. How [6t>] are we to continue to handle goods which cost us the full price, while the notion bazaars who have bought them at reduced rates, use [25] them only for bait to catch customers for other goods, whose rich profits reward them for the ruse? Gentlemen, these cut rates will first banish [50] proprietary articles out of the retail drugstore and afterwards out of the market entirely . We are not so ready to become dry goods merchants [75] and grocers as they are to become drug vendors. Will a sensible person put any trust in the articles claiming to benefit him externally or [7O] internally, which have so little financial value? Cannot druggists place themselves on a par with these rivals by decrying such goods, and making a cheap [25] substitute of their own? Whatever success an article may have had in the past may it not be deprived of it by the united action [50] to those to whom it mainly owes its original success? Have we not the chemical abilities to decompose articles in our line, and use their [75] elements to purposes of our own? In speaking thus I voice the sentiments of the retailers of the city and state which I represent on [71 this occasion. At the same time I entertain a belief that the manufacturers, proprietors and wholesale agents of the proprietary medicines in our country will [25] feel it to their own interests as well as ours to take such measures as will at once extinguish this evil, by withhold- ing their goods [50] from cutters of every kind, and selling them only to regular pharmacists of known standing and honor. "Fiat justitia, ruat coelum" "Though Heaven should totter [75] to its fall, "Let justice be done to one and all." The President Are there any more associations that desire to be heard from? If [7 ] not, gentlemen, I deeply sympathize with the Association that the time has arrived, in the regular order of business, for the affliction upon you of [251 the Presi- dent's address. The chair will cheerfully entertain a motion to relieve yon of that punishment. Laughter Cries of "address," give it to us," etc. [50] ADDRESS OF PRESIDENT VAX SCHAACK. Gentlemen of the Convention: The old German proverb says, "Speech is silver, but silence is golden;" yet the revolving wheel [75] of time marks the close of each year of our Association's history as an epoch which well demands a careful review of the past, in [73] order that, profiting by its experiences, we may strengthen our bulwarks for the future. Look- ing back over fifteen years a period far longer than that [2o] commonly devoted by men to any one mercantile pursuit we can recall no time, in the history of our organization, when such a review could [50] have afforded us more profound satisfac- tion or more intensely convinced us of the wisdom and expediency of our coming together, than the present. Never before [75] have we been able to grasp one another's hands in heartier mutual congratulations, or in a more earnest resolve to stand firm on the solid [7-t] foundation upon which our Association is built. Born in an era of local jealousies, so intensely bitter that its sponsors were forced to concede that [25] its future at best was uncertain and its success problematical, our Association was .called into existence by the exigencies of the situation. A business conducted [50] by men of otherwise signal ability had drifted into a whirlpool of unmercantile, ruinous and excessive competition, an especially striking instance of which was afforded [75] by the utter demoralization in prices of proprietary articles which day by day were unfortunately increasing in number. This unhappy state of affairs gave birth [7**] to the Rebate Plan a system which, though not affording us all the relief we could desire, has met the approval of almost the entire [25] jobbing drug trade and the leading proprietary medicine manufacturers of the United States. I need hardly say, gentlemen, that upon its faithful maintenance depends the [50] very perpetuity of the system. The history of individuals, communities and associations make up the history of a nation. How well each of us shall [75] act his part is the question that most con- cerns us, and upon the answer may in some degree depend the prosperity, the wel- fare, and the [7(5] greatness of our beloved country Gathered together as we are literally from the four quarters of the Union; from the frozen Lake of the North, [25] drained by the mighty Mississippi, to the sunken bayous that skirt its delta; from the shores of the Atlantic to the Golden Gate, the feet [50] of whose pillars are kissed by the waves of the Pacific this large assemblage is a most interesting event in the history of our organization; [75] meeting as we do here to-day in the capital of the greatest nation on the face of the globe a nation whose public credit we [77] can, in no spirit of vain-glorious boasting, claim stands first to-day among the nations of the world a country which was baptized in the [25] blood of the Revolution, shed during the eight years of heroic struggle, has since seen its perpetuity forever assured a Republic which has successfully solved [50] the great question of "self-government" which has afforded under the protecting aegis of its free institutions an asylum for the oppressed of every clime [75] and tongue a country that gives promise of as magnificent achievements in literature, in science and in arts as it has already attained in agriculture, [78] in mechanics, and in its inventive skill, and all that goes to make up a great and prosperous people in the world's history, a power [25] that will shortly welcome as its guests the nations of the earth at that great entrepot of commerce, the queen of the mighty inland seas, [50] the second city of the union, to celebrate a discovery as matchless as it has proved beneficent, so that to-day the future of America is [75] so positively assured, that the whole of Christendom intently watches its progress and whether we look back over the past, or turn our glances forward [79] into the dim vista of the future, we can proudly claim that we have taken the first position in the community of nations, and thank [25] God in the words of St. Paul that "we are citizens of no mean country." (Great Applause.) The fierce struggle of the day is between [50] the vast concentration of capital and brains on the one hand, and individual effort on the other. The dissonant voice of complaint is heard on [75] every side on the street, in the workshop, in the fields and in the mines, and from a laudable desire to remove the cause of [8O] this dis- content have sprung many of the tentative and erratic efforts of the legislative bodies of the Union. The problem remains yet unsolved and still [25] commands the closest attention of the profoundest sociologist and the most astute political economist of the land. Gentlemen, we can fairly claim that the cause [50] of true pharmacy has advanced under the auspices of our Association. We have seen schools for education in the noble science, spring up in almost [75] every State and Territory, and whatever effort has lain in our power for the betterment of the condition of the retail drug trade of the [81] country whose friends and allies we rightly are has been promptly, earn- estly and faithfully put forth. In accordance with the time-honored custom of our [25] body, I have appointed delegates to attend the annual meeting of the American and every State Pharma- ceutical Association during the past year, to extend our [50] cordial greetings with the hope of cementing the friendly relations of the past, and forming new ones for the future. We have invited each and [75] all of them to send a representative to the meetings to make such suggestions as they thought might tend to strengthen the bond of interest [82] which should exist between us. The successful battle which we fought for the removal of the odious stamp pn per- fumery, bay rum, etc. the struggle [25] in which we are to-day engaged to secure a reduction if not a total repeal of the war tax on alcohol as used in pharmacy [50] and the arts, as well as the recent defeat of the iniquitous Senate Bill 279, we have reason to believe have been fully [75] appreciated by them. To these delegates we extend the right hand of fellowship. We bid them welcome thrice welcome to share in our deliberations and [83] to join in our festivities. Their presence with us to-day is the best evidence of their appreciation of those fra- ternal feelings which our Association has [25] always aimed to cultivate. What more powerful argument can be adduced to prove the far-reaching influence and the inherent value of our Association than [50] its energetic and successful effort to secure the defeat of the obnoxious Senate Bill 279 ? It is indeed a cause for the most [75] profound surprise and regret that there is a member of the jobbing drug trade of the country, or a proprietor of a medical compound who [84] fails to appreciate the importance of our organization, or that any one of either class can be found so selfish as to participate in all [25] the benefits resulting from an association without being willing equally to share Us expenses, its labors, and its responsibilities. The Association -cannot but recognize at [50] their true worth the faithful services rendered and the signal ability displayed by the chairman of the Committee on Legislation, whose absence to-day we all [75] regret, and whose onerous duties, have been performed with the same energy and devotion which he has in other years brought to the service of [85] the Association in the same capacity. His exhaustive argument, appearing in pamphlet form on the Excise Tax and Customs, was a most comprehensive presentation of [25] the issues involved. The first bill reported by the committee on agriculture as absurd as the Pope's bull against the comet entitled a bill for [50] the "Prevention of Adulteration of Food or Drugs, and the Prevention of Poisonous Adulteration and for other purposes," a caption alike cap- tivating and false, received [75] from this committee, the Association of Proprietors and the Drug Exchange of Philadelphia, the first among our craft to sound the note of warning the [8(5] most prompt and determined opposition which happily resulted in its ignominious defeat. (Applause.) The title of the bill was a misnomer. The measure should have [25] been headed: "A bill to increase the importance of the cabinet office of Commissioner of Agricul- ure and for other purposes.' 1 '' Gentlemen, what were the "other [50] purposes?" To rob the drug trade of the United States of honestly acquired rights! To impose upon it annoyance and expense to which no other [75] branch of trade in the country is subjected! To provide" lucrative offices to the cormorants who hover around the legislative halls of the country, always [87] ready and eager to aid in enforcing any policy, however onerous and unjust, providing it be inquisitorial in its character! To subject to expensive delays [25] a legitimate branch of business! To enact a inea sure whose absurd provisions were demanded by neither the popular will nor its exponent, the press. To [50] throw open labratories and private premises of the drug trade for unwar- ranted and unjustifiable inspection and surveillance, and to divulge the process of manufacture many [75] of them attained at a vast outlay of money and scientific research and experiment of men engaged in an honorable business; an inquisition into private [88] business too high handed and too dastardly to be tolerated by any civilized country on the face of the earth. These, gentlemen, are a few [2.}] of the charges upon which we frame our indictment against the authors of that iniquitous bill. The bill elicited the earnest protest of the entire [">'>] drug trade of the country, as one which would work irreparable confusion and damage, and which was in its very essence, a violent fraud upon [7-")] many valuable interests. The deep indignation on the part of the druggists and proprietary medicine manu- facturers, who have been our faithful allies, did not spring [84)] so much from any disposition to oppose an honest effort to legislate against adulterated goods, though they saw no necessity for any bill, as from [25] a conviction that the bill was defec- tive, pernicious and unjust; and was based upon the most unfair imputation that adulterations in our branch of business [50] were general: not as we claim, and are prepared to prove exceptional. Gentlemen, I have dwelt on this subject, because I firmly believe the enemy [75] is only sleeping, and our antagonists will renew their efforts in the next Congress to further embarrass us by the passage of another bill, and [t)O] we should ever remember "To be forewarned is to be forearmed." (Applause. ) Probably since the organization of our Association, no committee has heretofore achieved fewer [25] practical results than that on transportation, and it is with un- qualified regret that I learn from its chairman that so little interest was manifested in [50] its proposition to establish a freight bureau, and that responses of any charac- ter was not received from more than 5 per cent, of our members [75]. I have faith to believe, gentlemen, that this will not always be so, but that the Association will wake up to the necessity and possibility [91] of attaining our rights in the direction of securing a thorough revision of the existing outrageously inconsistent freight classification and the institution, therefore, of a [25] schedule .honestly based on the value of the goods and the risks of transportation and I strongly urge upon the Association renewed, vigorous and persistent [50] effort in this important matter. Nothing in the history of our organization has been to me a cause for greater disappointment, deeper chagrin or keener [75] regret than the apparent apathy which some of our members have shown toward placing the Druggists' Mutual Insurance Company on a substantial and enduring basis [952]. There are gentlemen on this floor who were present at Minneapolis when the Association committed itself to the formation of the company, who, at the [25] time raised no voice in dis- proval of the project, and cast no vote against our corporate endorsement of the enterprise; yet who, while to-day undoubtedly [50] enjoying their fair share of the benefits arising from the organization of this company, have not subscribed a single dollar towards its capital. I say [75] "enjoy a portion of its benefits," because it must be conceded were it not for its existence, we would to-day be at the mercy of [93] the Board of Underwriters, and there can be no doubt that rates with have been materially increased. Indeed, I have heard from the lips of [25] insurance men themselves, that the dissolution of the Druggists' Mutual Insurance Company for lack of our support, would be regarded as a tacit admission on [50] our part that our risks were, as they have always claimed, and as we have always denied, with equal strenuousness, "extra hazardous," and would prove [75] the signal for the exaction of higher premiums from the jobbing drug trade of the country. The question stares us in the face. Are we [9-t] voluntarily to run into the very jaws of the danger which menaces us? I am frank to say I cannot understand how any dealer in [25] drugs, and least of all, any member of this Association, the very corner-stone of which is mutual protection, can be indifferent to an issue [50] which so vitally concerns us all, or can fail to recognize the manifold loss that must accrue to each individual if the company is not [75] heartily sustained. The problem that presents itself to us is: Should this burden be borne by a few liberal, enterprising and public spirited members of [95] our Association, while the accruing benefit is reaped by the entire trade? Should not all place their shoulders to the wheel for the advancement of [25] the common welfare ? The officers of the company have discharged their duties with scrupulous and unswerving fidelity, and have given to their work their very [50] best efforts. Is their's to be "love's labor lost?" or shall they receive the encouragement and co-operation which their enter- prise deserves? I trust their report [75] will receive your most careful attention, aiid that their recommendation will command the substantial approval which they so eminently merit, because of their untiring devotion [i)O] to the interests of the cause. But, gentlemen, ignoring the consideration of self-interest, are we not bound in honor to support this company, whose [25] officers will to-day clearly demonstrate to you not only that they have done a successful business, but that they are worth}- of your unreserved confidence [50] and cordial^ co-operation. I do not hesitate to say that I should esteem it a stain upon our good name should we fail heartily to [75] stand by this Child of our Association. The favorable decision rendered by Judge Hammond, in the United States Circuit Court in Western Tennessee, in April [i)7] last, after a third trial, in the case of the Mansfield Drag Company vs. three eastern companies, is of vital interest to the entire drug [25] trade of the country, involving as it did, the hitherto untried issue of the liability of insurance companies for proprietary or compounded medicines prepared by [50] druggists. The trade is certainly under no small obligations to Messrs. Mansfield & Co. for their tireless efforts in bringing the question to a final [75] test, and it is sincerely hoped that the decision will prove to the insurance companies at once a rebuke and a lesson. It is due [t)J$] to the Druggists' Mutual Insurance Company to say, that it paid its loss promptly in this case as in every other. The report of the [25] Committee on Proprietary Goods, always one of the most important, will naturally elicit your closest attention. Even the man who was once arbiter of the [50] destines of Europe, the great Napoleon himself, met his Waterloo; but defeat is a word unknown in the vocabulary of the able and vigilant chairman [75] of that Committee, to whose unwearied energy we may attribute the comparatively few complaints of violation of the contract plan. Sincere gratitude is also due [SK)J to the proprietors who have so faithfully stood by the committee, aiding it by both word and work. The few leading manufacturers who are still [25] without the fold we hope will yet see the fairness of the plan, and I respectfully recommend the in- coming committee to persevere in the effort [50] to secure the co-operation of the few recalcitrants not now committed to the contract plan a system which, while it scarcely affords even a fair [75] profit for handling their goods, considering the great expense in conducting the business, not only affords a just protection to the manu- facturer, but at the [1OO] same time results in good alike to the consumer and the dealer. (10,012 words.) giifThe foregoing 10,000 words of convention report represent a supplement to Haven's Complete Manual of Typewriting. See advertisement below. 4 r\ f\ MISCELLANEOUS I nTTTDO 4 r\ If II I ACTUAL BUSINESS Lt. I I CLPiO If 1 I Arranged for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted I I r\ m and numbered for timing speed, like above convention report, will be II llv [ \J \J sent by C. HAVEN, Room 17, Tribune Bldg., Chicago, 111., on receipt of 1 \S U Il),UUU I t-^=> I MVK^MM Y Selected for Shorthand and Typewriting practice, with words counted and numbered for If/ timing speed will be sent by C. HAVEN, Tribune Building, Chicago, Illinois, on receipt of I \J[ /\ I I T l__J p^" y\ I > /""N \ I C^ letters, testimony and convention prac- f*^- I I I I I C f*^.^^J\^J V I tice, and much more, together with a complete set of Haven's easy and self-teaching 300 Words a Minute Shorthand Lessons will be sent FREE to every purchaser of Haven's Complete .Manual of Typewriting, endorsed by the New York Hcnilil, Philadelphia Press, Boston Hrrald, and other leading Eastern and Western dailies, and hosts of practical operators, as "The only complete work on Typewriting published." The Manual contains fac-simile specimens of typewriter work of every kind epistolary, Society, legal, journalistic, and commercial accompanied by perfectly clear explanations descrip- tive of each specimen, its execution in detail, spacing, centering of lines, rules of contrast, etc., most of the points being found to be both new and useful to even the most expert operators. Whether you are teacher, expert', learner, or about to learn typewriting no matter what make of machine you favor you cannot afford to be without a copy. Price. $2.00 to the public but $1.33 to anyone who, when they send the money, will tell where they saw this advertisement. Remit to C. HAVEN, Tribune Bldg., Chicago, 111. SOIMIIE] Showing the advantages possessed by Haven's distinct joined vowels over othe- systems in making legible, without decreasing speed, those words wherein must be written, etc., etc. GRAHAM. HAVEN. LINDSLEY. CROSS. Ape * V 1 ^ Away * * " ^ Iowa 2 | tX ^ I. PI THAN. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Evaporate. ^ V \ I. PITMAN.. GRAHAM. HAVEN. Emigrant ^~ ->o ^, ^ Immigrant < -Vj v-T, _^ B. PI THAN. I PITMAN. HAVEN. Room -. s-^ t^x ^ Leave Love Will We You will Have been PITMAN. A^ /v ..../^ rt ^ HAVEN. f^\ / N ^-^ /~^ T 1 \ NORTHWESTERN AGENTS, 185 LK 8ILLE 8T P , CHICAGO, Mention this advertisement IB>><' em, should correspond with the Haven Col- lege nearest their address. HAVEN COLLEGES OF Short-Hand and Type-Writing, CHICAGO, ILL,, 1302 W. Madison Street, Mrs. CURTIS HAVEN, Principal. PHILADELPHIA, Pa., 1126 South Broad Street, J. M. CONWA Y, Principal. ROCHESTER, N. Y., 16 State Street, B. S. UNDERBILL, Principal. DALLAS, TEXAS, C. HAXSEX, Principal. L CKP OR T, N. Y.,38 Hodge Opera II' E. L, WARREN, Principal. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. A 000 571 383 9 -